JP5863211B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent the occurrence of a control process that impairs game playability, and can impair the interest of a player in gaming. A gaming machine has a pseudo game that causes a player to execute a game in a pseudo manner, and temporarily displays a display combination in which a CZ transition lottery is executed as an effect lottery related to an AT state when the pseudo game is executed. The probability is higher than the probability of stopping and displaying the weak rare replay or the strong rare replay when each reel is stopped in this game. When the reel effect determining means 29 determines to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the pseudo game, the reel effect determining means 29 shifts to a latent state that continues at least until the total number of executions of the game reaches a predetermined number of games, and the latent state is changed. After finishing, the pseudo game is executed. The reel effect determination means 29 cancels the result of the reel effect lottery determined to execute the pseudo game when a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied during the latent state, and determines whether or not to execute the pseudo game by a re-lottery process. decide. [Selection] Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine (swivel type gaming machine, slot machine) including a plurality of reels having symbols arranged on an outer peripheral surface is known. This type of gaming machine gives a certain game value to game media such as medals and pachinko balls, and performs a game for acquiring such game media. In addition, this type of gaming machine has an internal lottery triggered by the player's rotation start operation and starts rotating a plurality of reels, and the player's stop operation triggers an aspect according to the result of the internal lottery. The control is performed to stop a plurality of reels. The game result is determined by the symbol combination displayed on the winning determination line in a state where the plurality of reels are stopped, and medals are paid out according to the game result.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine that makes it easy to acquire a game medium by changing the winning probability of a role by executing an assist time state as a performance state for performing a winning assist effect that assists in winning a winning combination has gained popularity. doing. In such a gaming machine, when a specific role is won by an internal lottery, an assist time state in which a prize-winning auxiliary effect of a small role is executed in a game after the next game of the game winning the specific role The technique which transfers to (for example, patent document 1) is disclosed.

Patent No. 4881254

  In the invention described in Patent Document 1, in the game after the next game that won a specific role in the internal lottery, the effect state shifts to the assist time state based on winning the specific role, and the assist time In the game immediately before the transition to the state, by notifying that the transition of the production state to the assist time state, even if the winning of a specific role and winning could not be won, the production state will transition to the assist time state It is possible to raise the player's expectation for notifying and shifting to the assist time state, and to improve game playability.

  Here, in a gaming machine, it is common to provide a plurality of types of triggers for executing a lottery process related to the transition of a gaming state or a production state. Therefore, as in the invention described in Patent Document 1, in a gaming machine in which a specific combination is won by internal lottery and a transition to the assist time state is scheduled after execution of a plurality of games, for example, a plurality of games When the production state shifts to the assist time state by another lottery process during the execution of, the transition to the assist time state is based on the fact that the production state has already won the specific role in the internal lottery because the production state is already the assist time state. Or a control process that impairs the gameability, such as granting a privilege in the assist time state based on winning a specific role when the performance state is the normal state, There was a problem that interest in games was lost.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the occurrence of control processing that impairs game playability and can impair the interest of a player in gaming.

The present invention includes a plurality of reels (R1, R2, R3) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface;
An internal lottery means (23) for performing an internal lottery for determining whether or not a plurality of types of winning combinations including a small role, a replay and a bonus are made;
Reel control means (24) for performing a control for rotating the reels for each game and stopping the rotating reels based on a stop operation;
In a state where the plurality of reels are stopped, a winning determination means for determining that a winning combination has been won based on the fact that a symbol combination indicating a winning pattern predetermined for each winning combination is displayed on the active line (L1). 25)
A payout control means (26) for determining the number of payouts of game media based on the payout of the winning small combination when the small winning combination is won;
Based on the winning of the bonus in the normal state, the game is shifted to a bonus establishment state having a higher replay win probability than the normal state, and the gaming state is transferred to the bonus state based on the winning of the bonus in the bonus establishment state. Game control means (27) for causing;
In the bonus establishment state, when the production state is shifted between a plurality of types of production states including the normal production state and the assist time state, and the production state is set to the assist time state, the prize for the small role is awarded. Production control means (30) for performing control for causing the production device (80) to execute a prize winning assistance production to assist,
The winning determination means performs a process of executing the next game without consuming game media based on the winning of the replay,
In the normal state, the bonus establishment state, and the bonus state, the number of game media to be inserted when starting a game is set to be the same,
The internal lottery means
In the normal state and the bonus establishment state, a plurality of types of specific small roles, which are small roles in which the number of game media payouts associated with winning a prize is larger than the number of inserted coins, are not duplicated with each other and overlapped with other small roles. An internal lottery is performed so that there are multiple types of first winning modes,
In the bonus state, there is a second winning mode in which the plurality of types of specific small roles are won in duplicate, and the probability of becoming the second winning mode in the internal lottery in the bonus state is the first type of the plurality of first winning types. The probability of winning for some small roles among all small roles is higher than that in the normal state and the bonus establishment state, and the small roles other than the partial small roles The internal lottery is performed so that the winning probability is the same as the normal state and the bonus establishment state, and the small combinations other than the some small combinations include at least one of the plurality of types of specific small combinations. ,
The reel control means is
In the state where the bonus is established and the bonus and the replay or the small role are both won, the spinning reel is stopped so that the replay or the small role wins in preference to the bonus,
The correct hit order according to the type of the first winning mode is set in advance for each of the plurality of types of first winning modes, and if the correct hit order, the specific small part wins and is different from the correct hit order. In such a case, the spinning reel is stopped so that the specific small role does not win,
The production control means
When the effect state is set to the assist time state, the type of the first winning mode is determined by the winning assistance effect based on the result of the internal lottery being one of the plurality of first winning modes. A game machine that notifies the correct hit order according to
The internal lottery means performs an internal lottery so that the probability of losing in the bonus state is higher than the probability of losing in the normal state and the bonus established state,
The small combinations include a first small combination and a second small combination with a smaller number of payouts than the first small combination,
The reel control means stops the rotating reel so that the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role increases when the first small role and the second small role are won in duplicate. In this way, the first small combination is controlled in preference to the second small combination .

According to the present invention, it is possible to design the game media acquisition performance related to the assist time game after lowering the expected value of the game media acquisition rate in the bonus state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving design freedom .

It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the functional block of the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery table in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure explaining the winning aspect of batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 won in the normal state and bonus establishment state in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention, (B) is JAC1 and winning in the bonus state It is a figure explaining the winning aspect of JAC2. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination displayed on an active line at the time of establishment of normal replay, weak rare replay, and strong rare replay in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement | sequence of the reel in the game machine of embodiment of this invention. (A) is a state transition diagram of the gaming state in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention, (B) is a state transition diagram of the main effect state. It is a figure explaining the reel production | presentation lottery table in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display combination lottery table in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(P) is a figure which shows the transition of the display combination set to the display combination storage area at the time of winning 3 times or more by combo lottery in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a state transition diagram of the production state in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a detailed setting example of the winning probability of the internal lottery executed in the normal state and the bonus establishment state in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention, and (B) is the details of the internal lottery executed in the bonus state. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the game performed in the game in the game machine of embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process performed in the control process of the game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the control process of the game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation game process performed in the internal lottery process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pseudo game process performed in the pseudo game process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd pseudo game process performed in the pseudo game process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd simulated game process performed in the simulated game process shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a reel stop process executed in the game control process shown in FIG. 13, the first pseudo game process shown in FIG. 17, and the second pseudo game process shown in FIG. 18. (A) is a figure which shows the stop data of the replay in the normal state in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention, (B) is a figure showing the stop data of the replay in the bonus establishment state. It is a figure explaining the setting process which sets a score for every symbol arranged in the surrounding surface of each reel in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the reel stop area | region initial setting process in the game machine of embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the stop table data in the game machine of embodiment of this invention, (B) is a figure explaining a score calculation process. It is a figure explaining the reel stop position determination process in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop table data in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the reel temporary stop position determination process in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd pseudo game reel control process performed in the 3rd pseudo game process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special addition specialization reel control process performed in the internal lottery process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main effect state transition process performed in the control process of the game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main effect state transition process performed in the control process of the game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the re-lottery process performed in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14, and the main effect state transition process shown in FIG. 30, FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the effect performed in the effect in the game machine of embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception process performed in the control process of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in the command reception process shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a normal performance state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 35. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a CZ state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd CZ state process performed in the CZ state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd CZ state process performed in the CZ state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special CZ state process performed in the CZ state process shown in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the AT state start time process performed in the AT state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal AT state process performed in the AT state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal AT state process performed in the AT state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal addition state process performed in the AT state process shown in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a normal added state end process executed in the normal added state process shown in FIG. 45. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an extra special state process executed in the AT state process shown in FIG. 41 and the special extra special state process shown in FIG. 48. It is a flowchart which shows the special addition specialization state process performed in the AT state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation bonus state process performed in the AT state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pseudo | simulation bonus state process performed in the pseudo | simulation bonus state process shown in FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a second pseudo bonus state process executed in the pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG. 49 and the first pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG. 50. 52 is a flowchart showing a third pseudo bonus state process executed in the pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG. 49 and the second pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning command reception performed in the process at the time of command reception shown in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a third CZ state automatic execution process executed in the winning command reception process shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an AT state winning process performed in the winning command reception process shown in FIG. 53. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the input command reception performed in the process at the time of the command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the reel stop process in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the reel stop process in the gaming machine of the embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described. In addition, this embodiment demonstrated below does not unduly limit the content of this invention described in the claim. In addition, all the configurations described in the present embodiment are not necessarily essential configuration requirements of the present invention.

1. Configuration FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an external configuration of a slot machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called spinning-type game machine, and is a type of game machine that performs a game using a medal as a game medium.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a reel unit including a first reel R1 to a third reel R3 as a plurality of reels is housed in a box-shaped casing including a storage box BX, a front upper door UD, and a front lower door DD. It has been. A hopper unit 79 as a medal payout device is housed in the lower portion of the reel unit in the housing. In addition, a CPU, a ROM (an example of an information storage medium), a RAM, and the like are mounted in the casing of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and a control board 10 (see FIG. 2) that controls the operation of the slot machine 1 is also housed. It has been.

  Each of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 shown in FIG. 1 is divided into 21 regions (hereinafter, each region is referred to as “frame”) at regular intervals on the outer peripheral surface. One of the symbols is arranged. Further, the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are pivotally supported by a stepping motor (not shown) as reel driving means, and are each driven to rotate around the axis of the stepping motor, and the number of drive pulses of the stepping motor. And by controlling the pulse width and the like, the frame can be stopped in units of frames (a predetermined rotation angle unit and a predetermined rotation amount unit). That is, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the stepping motor rotationally drives the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 according to the drive pulse supplied from the control board 10, and the supply of the drive pulse from the control board 10 is interrupted. When it is leaned, the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 stop as the rotation of the stepping motor stops.

  The front upper door UD and the front lower door DD are provided so that they can be opened and closed individually. The front upper door UD is provided with a display window DW that allows observation of the rotation state and the stop state of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. In the stopped state of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, the plurality of types of symbols arranged at regular intervals on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are continuously arranged on the outer peripheral surface. The three symbols (the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol) can be observed from the front of the slot machine 1 through the display window DW.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper, middle, and lower stages are provided for each reel as display positions for observing the symbol through the display window DW, and an effective line is set depending on the combination of the display positions of each reel. Is set. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of medals required for one game, the so-called prescribed insertion number is set to three, and when a medal corresponding to the prescribed insertion number is inserted, the first reel R1 The effective line L1 configured by the middle stage of the third reel R3 and the lower stage of the second reel R2 is activated.

  The game result is a combination of symbols of the reels that are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 among symbols of the reels that are stopped and displayed in the display window DW (hereinafter, the symbols of the reels that are stopped and displayed). When the symbol combination on the effective line L1 is a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined combination, the combination is determined as a winning combination from the hopper unit 79 (described later). The medals are paid out.

  A game information display section DS is provided on the front upper door UD. The game information display unit DS includes an LED, a lamp, a 7-segment display, and the like. The number of medals credits, the number of medals paid out or won in one game, and the total number of medals paid out or won in a bonus state. Various game information such as the total of the game is displayed.

  The front upper door UD is provided with a display device 81 for performing a game effect. The display device 81 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display, and displays various videos and images for assisting the game or exciting the game. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a prefetch display area 82 composed of a first prefetch display area 82a to a fifth prefetch display area 82e as video and images displayed on the display device 81. Details of the prefetch display area 82 will be described later.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of speakers (not shown) for performing a game effect are provided for the front upper door UD and the front lower door DD. From the speaker, various sounds for assisting the game or exciting the game are output.

  The front lower door DD is provided with various operation means. The operation means includes a single bet button BT for inserting one medal and a max bet button MB for inserting a predetermined number of medals as input operation means for performing an operation of inserting a credited (stored) medal. The first lever R1 to the third reel R3 are rotated by a stepping motor and a start lever SL as a game start operation means for causing the player to execute a start operation that triggers the start of the game. Stop button B1 to stop button B3 as stop operation means for causing the player to execute a stop operation that triggers the stop of each of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, and to settle the credited medal Checkout button BS and when selecting a chance zone state and pseudo bonus state, which will be described later Jog dial JG as operating means for performing the selection operation and determination operation to the player and have are also provided.

  The jog dial JG includes a ring-shaped dial portion JGD that can rotate left and right, and a determination button JGB that is provided at the center of rotation of the dial portion JGD and can be pressed. The dial unit JGD includes a dial unit 75 that includes a sensor that can detect the rotation direction and the rotation amount (angle) and an output unit that can output the rotation direction and rotation amount (angle) detected by the sensor. . The decision button JGB includes a decision switch 76 that outputs a decision signal to the control board 10 when the decision button JGB is pressed. The decision switch 76 changes the decision signal output to the control board 10 from the OFF state to the ON state when the player presses the decision button JGB. Further, the determination switch 76 changes the determination signal from the ON state to the OFF state by releasing the determination button JGB that the player is in the pressed state. The player can select a specific item from the items displayed on the display device 81 by rotating the dial portion JGD left and right, and confirming the selected item by pressing the enter button JGB. can do. The slot machine 1 executes various processes based on items determined by the operation of the jog dial JG by the player. In addition, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment instructs the display device 81 to press the determination button JGB in a third chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as “CZ state”) described later. And the player is made to press the enter button JGB.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot MI or when the medal is credited more than the predetermined insertion number, the player presses the single bet button BT as many times as the predetermined insertion number. Alternatively, by performing an operation of pressing the max bet button MB, the preparation state is set in which the rotation control of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 can be started. Then, when the player presses the start lever SL, that is, when the player executes a start operation on the start lever SL, the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are started to rotate on the control board by driving the stepping motor, An internal lottery using a random value is performed, and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed on condition that the rotation speed of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 is increased to a predetermined speed and becomes a steady rotation. Is permitted, that is, the stop operation by the stop buttons B1 to B3 is validated.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 at an arbitrary timing (hereinafter, the timing at which the player presses each stop button is described as “pressing timing”), the stop button B1 to the stop button A stop switch 74 as a stop signal output means incorporated in each of B3 performs an ON operation, and changes the reel stop signal output to the control board 10 from the OFF state to the ON state. Here, the stop switch 74 includes, for example, a photo sensor, a continuity sensor, a pressure sensor, and the like.

  In addition, when the player releases the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 that are being pressed at an arbitrary timing, the stop switches corresponding to the stop buttons B1 to B3 perform the OFF operation, and the reels output to the control board 10 The stop signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state.

  Then, the control board 10 responds to the result of the internal lottery based on the change from the OFF state to the ON state of the reel stop signal whose signal state changes according to the press timing and release timing of the stop buttons B1 to B3. The first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped at the stopped position.

  Further, the slot machine 1 validates the operation of the jog dial JG by the player as the game progresses. When the slot machine 1 selects the CZ state (described later), shifts to the third CZ state of the CZ state (described later), and selects the pseudo bonus state (described later), the player performs jog dial JG Is enabled, and a screen corresponding to the operation of the jog dial JG is displayed on the display device 81. When the slot machine 1 causes the player to select the CZ state or the pseudo bonus, and the dial portion JGD of the jog dial JG is rotated, the item to be selected is changed corresponding to the rotation operation. Is displayed on the display device 81, and when the determination button JGB is pressed, an effect is displayed that informs the player that the item to be selected is determined and processing is executed based on the determined item. Display on the device 81. Further, the slot machine 1 activates the pressing operation of the determination button JGB by the player when the effect state shifts to the third CZ state, and relates to the transition of the effect state using the number of times the determination button JGB is pressed. A lottery process is executed.

  A medal payout port MO and a medal tray MP are provided at the lower part of the front lower door DD, and a number of medals according to the game result are paid out from the medal payout port MO to the medal tray MP. ing. Further, for example, when the settlement button BS is pressed while the credited medal is stored in the gaming machine, the number of credits (number of credited medals) from the hopper unit when the settlement button BS is pressed. A settlement process for paying out a corresponding number of medals is executed, and medals are paid out from the medal payout exit MO to the medal tray MP.

  FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores a control unit 11 that executes control related to games and effects, and various programs and data tables that are used when the control unit 11 performs computations. It is controlled by a control board 10 having a storage unit 40 having a storage area for storing a calculation result obtained by executing a program. The control board 10 receives input signals from a plurality of operation detection means such as a medal insertion switch 71, a bet switch 72, a start switch 73, a stop switch 74, a dial unit 75, a decision switch 76, and the like for executing a game. Various calculations are performed, and operations of output means such as the reel unit 78, the hopper unit 79, the display device 81, and the acoustic device 83 are controlled based on the calculation results. The functions of the control board 10 are predetermined processors stored in advance in various processors (CPU, DSP, etc.), ASIC (gate array, etc.), ROM (an example of an information storage medium), or RAM, ROM, etc. It is realized by software consisting of these programs.

  The control unit 11 includes an insertion receiving unit 21, a random number generating unit 22, an internal lottery unit 23, a reel control unit 24, a winning determination unit 25, a payout control unit 26, a game control unit 27, and an operation receiving unit. 28, a reel effect determination means 29, and an effect control means 30. The storage unit 40 also includes a table storage means 41, a flag storage area 42, a counter storage means 43, a display combination storage area 44, a reel effect storage area 45, a game state storage area 46, and a main effect state storage. An area 47 and an effect state storage area 48 are provided. The control unit 11 executes various calculations with reference to data stored in the corresponding configuration of the storage unit 40 when performing various calculations using the corresponding configuration according to the progress of the game. In addition, the control unit 11 stores the results of various calculations in the corresponding configuration of the storage unit 40.

  The insertion accepting means 21 accepts the insertion of medals for each game, and performs a process of validating the start operation for the start lever SL based on the insertion of medals corresponding to the prescribed number of insertions (three). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first pressing operation of the start lever SL that is activated based on the insertion of medals corresponding to the predetermined insertion number is accepted as the game start operation by the player. In addition to triggering the rotation of the reels R1 to R3, the internal lottery means 23 described later triggers the internal lottery process. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot MI, the insertion accepting means 21 is inserted up to the specified number of insertions as the medal insertion switch 71 is operated. Set the medal in the inserted state. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the single bet button BT or the max bet button MB is pressed in the state where the medal is credited to the slot machine 1, the bet switch 72 is activated to be inserted. The accepting means 21 sets credited medals in the inserted state up to the specified number of inserted coins.

  The random number generation means 22 is means for generating a random number value for lottery. The random value can be generated based on, for example, a count value of an increment counter (a counter that counts a numerical value so as to circulate a predetermined count range). Each means constituting the control unit 11 acquires one of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535 generated by the random number generating means 22 at the time of execution of the lottery process related to the progress of the game, and each lottery Execute the process. Further, the production control means 30 acquires any of 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 generated by the random number generation means 22 at the time of execution of the lottery process relating to the production, and executes each lottery process. . In the present embodiment, the “random number value” is not only a value that is randomly generated in a mathematical sense, but is substantially generated because the acquisition timing is irregular even if the generation itself is regular. Includes a value that can function as a random number. Further, the effect control means 30 may be configured to acquire any of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 generated by the random number generation means 22 and execute each lottery process related to the effects. Good.

  The internal lottery means 23 performs an internal lottery process in which the player performs a start operation on the start lever SL, and determines whether the winning combination is based on a start signal output when the start switch 73 detects the start operation. It is a means to perform. In the internal lottery process, the internal lottery means 23 selects an internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state from a plurality of internal lottery tables (see FIG. 3) stored in the table storage means 41, and the selected internal lottery table. Various combinations or loses (non-winning) such as replays, small roles, and bonuses associated with random numbers in FIG. 6 and random numbers (random numbers for lottery) acquired from the random number generation means 22 are compared, Based on this, the internal winning combination flag corresponding to the combination determined to be won and stored in the flag storage area 42 of the storage unit 40 is set (ON state). Here, the replay is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals are automatically set to the inserted state when the symbol combination stopped on the active line L1 is a symbol combination indicating the establishment of the replay. Sometimes, the next game can be executed without causing the player to insert a new medal. The small combination is a combination in which medals corresponding to a payout set for each small combination are paid out when the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the active line L1 is a combination of symbols indicating winning of the small combination. In the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is prepared as a bonus continuous action device related to the first type special bonus as a bonus. In the following description, a combination that can be set in the flag storage area 42 based on the result of the internal lottery process is also referred to as a winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an internal lottery table A that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state, and an internal lottery that is selected when the gaming state is the bonus establishment state. Table B and a lottery table C selected when the gaming state is a bonus state are stored in the table storage means 41.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in each internal lottery table, for each of a plurality of random values (for example, 65536 random values from 0 to 65535), various combinations such as replay, small role and bonus, (Unselected) is associated. Here, the internal lottery table A and the internal lottery table B are set to have the same winning probability for the small role, and the random numbers correspond to the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 and the missing hand as the small part. It is attached. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, BB is prepared as a bonus, and in the internal lottery table A, BB is set as a lottery target. The internal lottery table B is different from the internal lottery table A in the replay win probability, and the replay win probability is higher than the internal lottery table A by making the replay a lottery object instead of BB and lose in the internal lottery table A. Is set to be high. In the internal lottery table C, random numbers are associated with JAC1 and JAC2 as small roles.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, Bell A, Bell B, special small combination A1, special small combination are given as winning small combinations (hereinafter referred to as “winning combination”). A2, special small combination A3, special small combination A4, special small combination B1, special small combination B2, and a missing combination are prepared. The hit order bell 1 to the hit order bell 8 as the winning mode and the JAC1 and JAC2 as the second winning mode are set. Here, the “batting order” means the order in which the pressing operation is performed on the stop button B1 to the stop button B3, and is composed of six types of batting orders of the batting order 1 to the batting order 6. The batting order 1 is a batting order referred to as a so-called forward push in which a stop operation is executed in the order of the stop button B1, the stop button B2, and the stop button B3. The batting order 2 is a batting order called so-called scissors, in which stop operations are executed in the order of the stop button B1, the stop button B3, and the stop button B2. The batting order 3 is a batting order in which stop operations are executed in the order of the stop button B2, the stop button B1, and the stop button B3. The batting order 4 is a batting order in which the stop operation is executed in the order of the stop button B2, the stop button B3, and the stop button B1. The batting order 5 is a batting order in which stop operations are executed in the order of stop button B3 → stop button B1 → stop button B2. The hitting order 6 is a hitting order called so-called reverse pressing in which stop operations are executed in the order of stop button B3 → stop button B2 → stop button B1.

  In the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 4, the bell A, any one of the special small roles A 1 to A 4, and the special small portion B 1 are selected and won. Further, in the hit order bell 5 to the hit order bell 8, the bell B, any one of the special small roles A1 to A4, and the special small role B2 are selected and won. Here, the special small roles A1 to A4 are winning combinations that can be won when the stop button B1 is first stopped (hereinafter referred to as “first stop operation”). This is a winning combination in which no winning combination (losing) may occur depending on the pressing timing. The bell A, the bell B, the special small role B1, and the special small role B2 are each a winning combination that can be won when the stop button B2 or the stop button B3 is first stopped. It is configured to win regardless of the timing of pressing the button. For example, when the winning order bell 1 is won and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the hit order 3, the bell A wins regardless of the pressing timing of each stop button. In the following description, the batting order for winning the bell A or the bell B set with a larger number of payouts (for example, 8) than the specified number of throws when winning each batting order bell is also referred to as a correct batting order. Further, in the following description, when winning each batting order bell, the special small roles A1 to A4, the special small roles B1 and the special small roles B1 that are set to have a smaller number of payouts than the bells A and B (for example, one) The batting order in which the special small role B2 can be won is also described as an incorrect answer batting order. In the present embodiment, in the slot machine 1, the stop buttons B1 to B3 are pressed in the order of the batting order 1 or the batting order 2 in a state where the effect control means 30 is not executing the control process for notifying the correct batting order. In the event of a penalty, a penalty-related process that causes a disadvantageous effect on the player is executed.

  The batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 each wins either one of the bell A or the bell B and two kinds of special small roles, both of which are different combinations of winning combinations to be won. It is configured as follows. In the following description, batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 4 are collectively referred to as batting order bell group 1, and batting order bell 5 to batting order bell 8 are collectively referred to as batting order bell group 2.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4B, JAC1 wins by overlapping Bell A and Bell B, and JAC2 wins special small role A1-special small role A4, special small role B1, special small size The winning combination B2 and the missing winning combination are won.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the internal lottery process is executed with reference to the internal lottery table A or the internal lottery table B and the replay is won, the normal replay, the weak rare replay, It is configured to win in duplicate with the strong rare replay. As shown in FIG. 5, each replay has a different symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 when it is established.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the internal lottery means 23 performs a batting order setting process, when a replay is won by internal lottery. When the batting order setting process is executed, each means constituting the control unit 11 wins a replay by internal lottery, and when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed down in the batting order 2 to the batting order 6, Processing corresponding to the batting order can be executed. The batting order set in the batting order setting process includes a clear replay batting order that triggers execution of a re-lottery process described later when pressed, and a second pseudo game process executed in an AT state described later when pressed. In the second pseudo game process executed in the AT state, which will be described later by being pressed, and the batting order of the high-accuracy transition replay that is the execution opportunity of the process for increasing the probability that the strong rare combination will be displayed, The high-end replay batting order that triggers the execution of the process of returning the probability that a strong rare combination is displayed to the normal winning probability, and the transition that triggers the execution in the special CZ state described later when pressed. Special replay special order that triggers the execution of the special specialization reel control process executed in the special specialization state, which will be described later by pressing the replay order. Is composed of a ray of batting order, it will be described later control process in the case where the batting order has been pressed. In addition, the batting order setting process includes a clear replay batting order, a high-accuracy transition replay batting order, a high-accuracy end replay batting order, a transition replay batting order, and a special extra special replay batting order each time a replay is won. Whether or not the batting order 2 to the batting order 6 is selected by a lottery. In the present embodiment, the batting order 2 to 6 and the control process when each batting order is pressed can be changed each time the replay is won by executing the batting order setting process every time the replay is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of replays that can be won by internal lottery are prepared. The batting order of the transition replay, the batting order of the high-accuracy end replay, the batting order of the transition replay, and the batting order of the special addition special replay are associated with each other, and each batting order associated with batting order 2 to batting order 6 is different depending on the selected replay. You may comprise as follows.

  The reel control means 24 rotates the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 by a stepping motor built in each reel based on the output of the start signal from the start switch 73 during execution of a normal game. And reel rotation control for rotating the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 for each game is executed. In addition, the reel control means 24 processes the start signal as a temporary start signal when a start signal is output from the start switch 73 during execution of a pseudo game to be described later. Rotational drive of the stopped first reel R1 to third reel R3 is resumed, and reel temporary rotation control substantially similar to reel rotation control for rotating the first reel R1 to third reel R3 is executed. Further, the reel control means 24, when the rotation state of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 becomes a rotation state that rotates regularly at a predetermined speed (for example, about 80 rpm), the stop button B1 corresponding to each reel. Control that validates the stop operation detected by the stop switch 74 when the stop button B3 is pressed is executed. When the stop operation is validated, the reel control unit 24 refers to the reel stop signal output from the stop switch 74 based on the stop operation detected when each stop button is pressed, and the reel unit 78 Reel stop control is performed to stop the supply of drive pulses (motor drive signals) to the stepping motor of the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and stop each of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3.

  Here, when each reel is stopped, the reel control means 24 performs control to stop the reel in a manner corresponding to the setting state of the internal winning combination flag storage area, that is, the result of the internal lottery. Here, the reel unit 78 includes a reel position detecting unit 78a having a photo sensor provided inside the reel unit 78 and a reel position detecting unit provided at a reference position during rotation of each reel. The reel position detecting means 78a provides the reel control means 24 with a reel index which is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation and indicating the reference position of the reel when the reel position detecting portion is detected by the photosensor. It is configured to output. The reel control unit 24 uses the reel index output from the reel position detection unit 78a and the rotation angle from the reference position of the reel at which the reel index is detected (calculated from the number of times of supply of drive pulses supplied to the stepping motor). Thus, a position in the rotation direction of the reel at the time of receiving the reel stop signal from the stop switch (hereinafter referred to as “reel rotation position”) is acquired. Then, the reel control means 24 uses the symbol arrangement table in which information about symbols arranged on the surface of each reel is stored and the result of the internal lottery to display on the effective line L1 when each reel is stopped. A process for determining a symbol to be performed and determining a stop position of each reel is executed, and control for stopping each reel is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control means 24 is configured to change the symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active line L1 according to the current gaming state. Specifically, when the replay is won by internal lottery, if the gaming state is the normal state, the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -RPB-RPA (RPB)” constituting the normal replay and the weak rare replay are configured. Both the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)” and the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLB-RPA (RPB)” constituting the strong rare replay are controlled so that they can be stopped and displayed. If the state is a bonus establishment state, control is performed so that only normal replay can be stopped and displayed. Thus, in this embodiment, the normal state which is a gaming state in which the symbol combination constituting each replay can be stopped and displayed constitutes the first gaming state. Further, the bonus establishment state, which is a gaming state in which the symbol combination constituting the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay cannot be stopped, constitutes the second gaming state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stop operation is validated, the first reel R1 corresponding to the stop button B1 is stopped by pressing the stop button B1, and the stop button B2 is pressed. Thus, the second reel R2 corresponding to the stop button B2 is stopped, and the third reel R3 corresponding to the stop button B3 is stopped by pressing the stop button B3. For this reason, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the order of pressing the stop buttons B1 to B3 changes, the stop order of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 changes. Further, the reel control unit 24 determines whether or not the order of the stop operations detected by the stop switch 74 when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed is the stop order set for each process. Means 24a are provided. When the stop order determination unit 24a determines the order of the stop operation, each unit configuring the control unit 11 executes each process based on the order in which the stop operation is executed.

  Further, the reel control means 24 outputs a reel stop signal output from the stop switch 74 when the stop buttons B1 to B3 are pressed before the stop operation detected by the stop switch 74 is validated. The reel temporary stop signal is processed, and reel temporary stop control is executed to temporarily stop the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 during execution of a pseudo game described later. Here, the temporary stop is reel control for stopping the rotation of each reel during execution of the reel effect. In the following description, the case where the rotation of each reel is stopped during the pseudo game is referred to as “temporary stop”, and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in a normal game (main game). Stopping the rotation of each reel based on this is referred to as “stop”. More details will be described later.

  Further, the reel control means 24, when stopping or temporarily stopping each reel, within 190 ms from the time when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed, the reel that is rotating corresponding to the pressed stop button. It is configured to be able to stop. Here, when the rotating reel is stopped within 190 ms as a predetermined stop time from the time when the stop button is pressed, the stop position of each rotating reel is the position when the stop button is pressed. It is determined within the range of the position where the reel is rotated by 4 frames from (0 frame). The reel control means 24 has a symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button that has been pressed among the stop buttons B1 to B3. When the button is pressed, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line L1 when it is located within the range of 0 to 4 frames relative to the display position on the effective line L1. Control is performed to stop the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button that has been pressed. The reel control means 24 of the present embodiment can temporarily stop the reel after rotating the reel for a predetermined stop time or more after receiving the reel temporary stop signal output from the stop switch 74 at the time of execution of the pseudo game. It is configured.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table stored in the table storage unit 41. The symbol arrangement table corresponds to the symbol arrangement arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 constituting the reel unit 78. As shown in FIG. 6, on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 of the present embodiment, a red 7 symbol “red 7”, a BAR symbol “BAR”, a special symbol “SP”, and a replay symbol A “ RPA, Replay Design B “RPB”, Bell Design A “BLA”, Bell Design B “BLB”, Cherry Design A “CHA”, Cherry Design B “CHB”, Watermelon Design “WM” and Blank Design “BLK” It is arranged.

  In the symbol arrangement table, symbol numbers “0” to “20” are associated with 21 symbols arranged on the surface of each reel in the order of movement in the reel rotation direction. Here, the symbol of symbol number “0” is a symbol displayed in the middle of the display window DW when the reel index is detected by the reel position detecting means 78a. That is, the symbol numbers “0” to “20” correspond to the reel rotation angles, respectively. When the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed, the reel control unit 24 calculates the rotation angle from the reference position of the reel where the reel index is detected, and the symbol number of the symbol arrangement table from the calculated rotation angle. Is obtained, the symbol located in the middle of the display window DW is specified.

  Further, the symbols constituting the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -RPB-RPA (RPB)” of the normal replay shown in FIG. 5 are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less. Therefore, the reel control means 24 can stop and display each symbol constituting the symbol combination of the normal replay on the effective line L1 regardless of the pressing timing when the replay is won by the internal lottery. In addition, each symbol constituting the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)” of the weak rare replay and each symbol constituting the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLB-RPA (RPB)” of the strong rare replay. The symbols are arranged such that the bell symbol A “BLA” and the bell symbol B “BLB” that need to be stopped and displayed on the second reel R2 are arranged with an interval of four frames or more. It is configured to be able to display a stop when it is appropriate.

  The winning determination means 25 performs a determination process for determining whether or not a winning combination has been won based on the stop mode of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Specifically, the winning combination stored in the table storage means 41 of the storage unit 40 is the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 when all of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped. It is determined whether or not a symbol combination indicating a winning pattern determined for each combination preset in the table, that is, a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination.

In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, each process is executed based on the determination result of the winning determination means 25 in the determination process. Each process executed based on the winning combination determination result in the determining process includes, for example, a process of determining the number of medals to be paid out to the payout control means 26 when a small combination wins, and a replay is established. In this case, a process for executing the next game without consuming medals is performed. When a bonus is won, the game control means 27 is caused to perform a process for shifting the game state. Here, when the small role is won, the winning determination means 25 is special if the winning small role is Bell A or Bell B as the first small role , and the winning small role is the second small role. In the case of the small combination A1 to the special small combination A4, the special small combination B1, the special small combination B2, or the missing combination, the payout control means 26 pays out one medal. Also, in the determination process, information on the winning combination that has been awarded, information on the winning combination that has won, information on the number of paid-out medals, and information on the order in which the stop buttons B1 to B3 are pressed. Is transmitted from the winning determination means 25 to the effect control means 30, the slot machine 1 causes the effect control means 30 to execute various effect processes based on the determination process.

  The payout control means 26 performs payout processing relating to the payout of medals according to the game result. Specifically, when a small combination wins, the number of medals to be paid out in the game is determined based on a predetermined payout for each combination, and a medal corresponding to the determined number of payouts is used as a payout device. Control to cause the hopper unit 79 to pay out is performed.

  The hopper unit 79 performs an operation of paying out medals of the payout number instructed by the payout control means 26. The hopper unit 79 is provided with a payout medal detection switch that operates every time a medal is paid out. The payout control means 26 is configured to manage the number of medals actually paid out from the hopper unit 79 based on an input signal from the payout medal detection switch. In the case where medal credits are permitted, instead of actually paying out medals by the hopper unit 79, the number of credits stored in a credit storage area (not shown) of the storage unit 40 (credited) A credit addition process for adding the number of payouts to the number of medals is performed to virtually pay out medals.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (A), the game control means 27 stores control processing relating to the transition of the game state between the normal state, the bonus establishment state, and the bonus state, in the effect state storage area 48. Main effect state transition processing relating to the transition of the main effect state for shifting the main effect state used for determining the set effect state between the first main effect state to the third main effect state, the power supply of the slot machine 1 Various processes relating to the progress of the game other than the control processes executed by the respective means constituting the control section 11 such as the respective sections constituting the control section 11 executed when the “ON” is turned ON and the area initialization process are performed.

  The normal state is a game state corresponding to the initial state among a plurality of types of game states. When the BB is won in the internal lottery process, the game control means 27 determines that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the normal state is It is possible to shift to the bonus establishment state. The bonus establishment state is a gaming state that shifts from the normal state when the BB is won in the internal lottery, and is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is set higher than in the normal state. The bonus state is a gaming state in which the symbol combination determined by the winning determination means 25 when the BB has won is shifted when triggered by the stop combination displayed on the active line L1. In the bonus state, when the predetermined number (for example, 100) exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 100) according to the total number of medals paid out, the game control means 27 determines that the condition for ending the bonus state is satisfied, and the game The state is changed from the bonus state to the normal state.

  The game control means 27 sets (ON) a game state flag corresponding to the current game state among the game state flags stored in the game state storage area 46 of the storage unit 40. Further, when each transition condition of the gaming state is satisfied, the game control means 27 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the transitioning gaming state and turns off the currently set gaming state flag. When the game state flag corresponding to the current game state is set in the game state storage area 46 by the game control means 27, the internal lottery means 23 refers to the game state flag set in the game state storage area 46. Then, an internal lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is determined from a plurality of internal lottery tables stored in the table storage means 41, and an internal lottery process is executed. In addition, by setting a game state flag corresponding to the current game state, the reel control unit 24 corresponds to the current game state from the stop data of each winning combination stored in the table storage unit 41. Stop data to be determined is determined, and control processing related to the stop of each rotating reel is executed.

  In addition, the game control means 27 executes a main effect state transition process, and the main effect state corresponding to the current main effect state among the main effect state flags stored in the main effect state storage area 47 of the storage unit 40. Set the flag to ON. As shown in FIG. 7B, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a first main effect state to a third main effect state as main effect states.

  The first main effect state is a main effect state corresponding to an initial state among a plurality of types of main effect states, and the effect state managed by the effect control means 30 in the main effect state transition process is a normal effect state (described later). Set mainly in some cases.

  The second main effect state is the order of stop operations detected by the stop switch 74, that is, the order in which the player presses the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the game won in the batting order bell group 1 or the batting order bell group 2. When the stop order determination unit 24a determines that the correct answer hit order for winning the bell A or the bell B, which is a predetermined stop order, the bell continuous correct answer counter of the counter storage means 43 is incremented by 1, and the bell continuous correct answer counter is stored. This is a main effect state controlled by the game control means 27 so as to shift when the value becomes 2. In other words, the game control means 27 has a winning assist effect that assists the winning of the bell A and the bell B when the striking order bell 1 and the striking order bell 2 are won when the effect state managed by the effect control means 30 becomes an assist time state (described later). When the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B is pressed, the first main effect state can be shifted to the second main effect state. In this way, the stop switch 74 in the batting order for winning the bell A or the bell B in the two games won in the batting order bell group 1 or the batting order bell group 2 to be shifted from the first main production state to the second main production state. The pressing operation of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 for detecting the stop operation constitutes a specific operation mode in the present embodiment.

  The second main effect state is a batting order in which the order in which the player presses down the stop buttons B1 to B3 when the batting order bell group 1 and the batting order bell group 2 are won cannot win the bells A and B. That is, when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed down in the hitting order that the stop order determining unit 24a determines that the stop order is not the predetermined stop order, the bell continuous incorrect answer counter in the counter storage unit 43 is incremented by one. When the stored value of the continuous incorrect answer counter becomes 2, the game control means 27 is controlled to shift to the first main effect state. In other words, the game control means 27 changes the play state managed by the play control means 30 from the assist time state to the normal play state, and cannot play the bells A and B when the batting order bell 1 and batting order bell 2 are won. Can be shifted from the second main effect state to the first main effect state.

  In the third main effect state, in the game won for replay, when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed down in the batting order set in the batting order setting process in the batting order setting process, the replay of the counter storage means 43 continues. The main effect state is controlled by the game control means 27 so as to shift to when the correct answer counter is incremented by 1 and the stored value of the replay continuous correct answer counter becomes 2. That is, the game control means 27 changes from the first main effect state to the third main effect state when the effect state managed by the effect control means 30 becomes a special CZ state (described later) and the transition replay batting order notification effect is executed. Can be migrated. Further, the third main effect state is controlled by the game control means 27 so as to shift to the first main effect state when a third pseudo game described later is finished.

  When the main effect state flag corresponding to the current main effect state is set in the main effect state storage area 47 by the game control means 27, the reel effect determination means 29 is set to the main effect state storage area 47. With reference to the effect state flag, a reel effect lottery process and various processes related to the pseudo game, which will be described later, are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game control means 27 has a normal state, a bonus establishment state, and a bonus state as the gaming state, but is not limited to this. For example, the normal state and the bonus establishment state are replays. It may have replay time states (RT states) with different winning probabilities, or may have a plurality of RT states with different replay winning probabilities. Moreover, although the game control means 27 is made to transfer as a main effect state between the 1st main effect state-the 3rd main effect state, the kind of main effect state is not limited to this, either.

  The operation receiving means 28 is a dial rotation signal output from the dial unit 75 when the player rotates the dial portion JGD of the jog dial JG, and a determination switch 76 when the determination button JGB of the jog dial JG is pressed. The determination signal and the effect signal output from the are transmitted to the effect control means 30 as input commands. Here, the dial rotation signal is a signal output from the output unit included in the dial unit 75 when the rotation direction and the rotation amount (angle) are detected by the sensor included in the dial unit 75, and is detected by the sensor. Information about the rotation direction and the rotation amount (angle) is included.

  The reel effect determination means 29 generates a freeze that delays the progress of the normal game (the main game), and performs a reel effect that is an effect of operating the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 in a specific manner during the occurrence of the freeze. A reel effect lottery process for determining whether or not to execute is performed. The reel effect determination means 29 generates a freeze based on a start signal output when the player performs a start operation on the start lever SL and the start switch 73 detects the start operation, and controls the reel. The reel effect lottery process is executed by the means 24 within a period until the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch 74 is validated. Further, as a result of the reel effect lottery process, when various reel effects are won, the reel effect determining means 29 controls each means constituting the control unit 11. In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 is configured to generate a freeze based on a start signal that is output when the start switch 73 detects a start operation. As long as it is within the period until the detection of the stop operation by the switch 74 is validated, the freeze may be generated at any timing. In addition, although it is configured to delay the progress of a normal game (main game) due to the occurrence of a freeze, the present invention is not limited to this, and by the occurrence of a freeze, the operation of the single bet button BT or the max bet button MB is performed. A configuration for invalidating the medal insertion operation or a configuration for invalidating the pressing operation of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 may be employed.

  In the reel effect lottery process, the reel effect determination means 29 selects a reel effect lottery table corresponding to the current main effect state from a plurality of reel effect lottery tables (see FIG. 8) stored in the table storage means 41, Various combinations or loses (non-winning) such as replay, small role and bonus associated with random numbers in the selected reel production lottery table, and random values (lottery random numbers) acquired from the random number generating means 22 The internal winning combination flag corresponding to the combination determined to be won based on the comparison result is set in the reel effect storage area 45 (ON state).

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reel effect lottery table A selected when the main effect state is the first main effect state, and the main effect state is the second main effect state. A reel effect lottery table B that is selected in some cases and a reel effect lottery table C that is selected when the main effect state is the third main effect state are stored in the table storage means 41.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in each reel effect lottery table, reel effects are executed as reel effects that are executed during the occurrence of freeze for each of a plurality of random values (for example, 65536 random values from 0 to 65535). The control unit 24 rotates the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 in the direction opposite to the normal rotation direction, and after a start operation is performed on the start lever SL, a predetermined time (for example, 5 The reel control means 24 does not operate the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 until the second), and the player operates the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 and the start lever SL to simulate a normal game. Various reel productions such as pseudo games to be experienced and losing (unfair) are associated. Here, the reel production lottery table A and the reel production lottery table B have different pseudo game winning probabilities, and the reel production lottery table B selected in the second main production state is the first main production. It is easier to determine a pseudo game than the reel production lottery table A selected in the state, that is, the pseudo game determination probability is changed.

  In other words, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment wins both the bell A and the bell B in two games won in the batting order bell group 1 or the batting order bell group 2 in response to the transition of the production state to the AT state. The stop switch 74 detects the stop operation in the hitting order to notify the pressing operation order of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3, and the player presses the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the notified hitting order so that the bell A or Bell B wins and changes the main effect state from the first main effect state to the second main effect state, thereby changing the reel effect lottery table referred to in the reel effect lottery, executing the pseudo game, and temporarily The probability of stop display can be changed. Thereby, since the slot machine 1 of this embodiment can change the probability that the display combination is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the effect state, the game property corresponding to the effect state is realized without increasing the data amount. be able to.

  When the reel effect determining means 29 wins the pseudo game as the reel effect, the reel effect determining means 29 controls each means constituting the control unit 11 and executes the pseudo game. At the time of execution of the pseudo game, the reel effect determination means 29 first starts rotation of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 in the normal game (main game) based on the start signal output from the start switch 73. A freeze to be delayed is generated and the output start signal is also processed as a temporary start signal to cause the reel control means 24 to temporarily rotate the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. When the player presses the stop button B1 to the stop button B3, the reel effect determination means 29 is frozen before the stop operation detected by the stop switch 74 is validated as described above. Therefore, the reel control means 24 processes the reel stop signal output from the stop switch 74 as a reel temporary stop signal, and temporarily stops the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. That is, the stop switch 74 is configured to detect a temporary stop operation for stopping each reel during execution of the reel effect.

  When the start switch 73 detects a start operation while the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped, the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are rotated or temporarily rotated. As described above, the start switch 73 has a predetermined number of coins inserted when a predetermined number of medals are inserted while the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped, and when the replay is established in the previous game. The start lever SL is depressed when the medal is automatically set to the inserted state and when the pseudo game is executed by the reel effect determining means 29 and the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped. By being operated, a start operation is detected and a start signal is output.

  In the pseudo game, when the player performs the start operation of the start lever SL and the press operation of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3, the temporary rotation of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 corresponding to each operation. Since the temporary stop is executed, the player is made to execute the game in a pseudo manner and give the player a feeling as if the normal game is being executed without being aware of the reel effect. Can do. In addition, since the pseudo game is one mode of reel production, a process involving payout of medals is not executed. Further, in the following description, detection of a stop operation by the stop switch 74 is validated, and stop control of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 is performed according to the winning result of the internal lottery and the press timing of the stop buttons B1 to B3. A normal game in which is executed is also referred to as a main game.

  In addition, in the game won for the pseudo game, the reel effect determination means 29 determines the symbol combination that can be temporarily stopped on the effective line L1 when the reel is temporarily stopped when the pseudo game is executed by symbol combination lottery. In the symbol combination lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 is selected from the plurality of display combination lottery tables stored in the table storage means 41, and the main effect state set in the current game progress and main effect state storage area 47. One display combination lottery table is determined based on the above, and the symbol combination associated with the random number value in the display combination lottery table is compared with the random number value (random number for lottery) acquired from the random number generation means 22, and the comparison result The symbol combination determined to have been won based on the above is determined to be a symbol combination that can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 when each reel is temporarily stopped. In the following description, a symbol combination that can be temporarily stopped during execution of the pseudo game determined by the symbol combination lottery process is also referred to as a display combination. It should be noted that the reel effect determination means 29 of the present embodiment determines whether or not to execute a pseudo game in the reel effect lottery, and executes the symbol combination lottery when it is determined to execute the pseudo game. Although it is configured to determine the display combination for temporary stop display, not limited to this, in the reel effect lottery table referred to in the reel effect lottery, by associating different random values for each pseudo game with different display combinations, It may be configured to be able to simultaneously determine whether or not the pseudo game is executed when the reel effect lottery is executed and the display combination that is displayed for temporary stop when the pseudo game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol combination that can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 as a display combination is the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)” that constitutes the weak rare replay shown in FIG. And a symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLB-RPA (RPB)” constituting a strong rare replay. As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effective line L1 includes the middle stage of the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 and the lower stage of the second reel R2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the symbols arranged on the second reel R2 include a watermelon symbol “WM” and a cherry symbol A “CHA” on the upstream side in the rotational direction of the bell symbol B “BLB”. One is arranged. Therefore, the reel effect determination means 29 is a symbol combination in which the watermelon symbol “WM” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the second reel R2 among the symbol combinations constituting the strong rare replay (hereinafter referred to as “strong rare role”). ) And the symbol combination in which the cherry symbol A “CHA” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the second reel R2 (hereinafter referred to as “chance combination”) is distinguished from another display combination. In the lottery, it is determined whether a weak rare combination, a strong rare combination, or a chance combination can be displayed temporarily. As described above, the weak rare combination, the strong rare combination, and the chance combination are the same symbol combination as the replay that can be displayed as stopped and formed as a weak rare replay and a strong rare replay when the game state is the normal state. That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of stopping and displaying the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the bonus establishment state, The weak rare replay and the strong rare replay cannot be stopped, and the same symbol combination as the weak rare replay and the same symbol combination as the strong rare replay can be temporarily stopped only when the simulated game is executed. Opportunities for displaying a combination of weak rare replays and graphic combinations of strong rare replays that can be used to provide benefits that are advantageous to the player. And the opportunity to display the temporary stop display by changing according to the gaming state, there are a wide variety of opportunities to enable the stop display and the opportunity to display the temporary stop display. It is possible to prevent the design of Watari game machine is complicated. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol combination (RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)) which comprises a weak rare combination, and the symbol combination (RPA (RPB) -BLB-RPA which comprises a strong rare combination and a chance combination) (RPB)) constitutes a specific symbol combination.

  In addition, the reel effect determination means 29 refers to the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 and determines the game to be executed in the pseudo game process. Specifically, as described above, when the first main effect state that is set when the effect state is mainly the normal effect state is set, the first pseudo game process is executed, and the effect state is When the second main effect state that is mainly set in the AT state (described later) is set, the second pseudo game process is executed, and the effect state is in the special CZ state (described later). When the third main effect state to be set is set, a third pseudo game process as a special reel effect is executed.

  When executing the first pseudo game process, the reel effect determination means 29 first executes the first pseudo game display combination lottery as a symbol combination lottery in the game won for the pseudo game as the reel effect. The display combination determined by the display combination lottery is set in the display combination storage area 44 of the storage unit 40, and after executing the first pseudo game, the game is executed a predetermined number of times (5 in this embodiment). After that, the number of consecutive executions (the number of combos) for executing the first pseudo game again is determined by a combo lottery as a continuous execution lottery. In the first pseudo game display combination lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the lottery with reference to the display combination lottery table A shown in FIG. decide.

  In the following, in the case of executing the first pseudo game process, the details of the process performed by the reel effect determination means 29 using the display combination storage area 44 are exemplified by the case where the combo lottery determines 3 combo times. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (P) are diagrams showing the display combination storing area 44. In the figure, “◯” indicates the display combination set in the display combination storing area 44, and “●” in the figure. "Indicates a display combination cleared from the display combination storage area 44. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display combination storage area 44 is composed of an 8-byte area from the first display combination storage area 44a to the eighth display combination storage area 44h. When the pseudo game is won in the lottery, the reel effect determining means 29 sets the display combination in the eighth display combination storage area 44h. In addition, when the reel effect determination means 29 wins the pseudo game in the reel effect lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 is in a latent state that continues until at least the total number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number of games (8 times in the present embodiment). Transition. The reel effect determination means 29 displays the display combination in the eighth display combination storage area 44h in a game in which the latent state is started, that is, a game in which the number of main games executed until the latent state ends is eight. When the game with the display combination set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h is completed, the remaining number of times that the game is executed until the latent state is completed is seven. In the following description, the first display combination storage area 44 a is also described as the head of the display combination storage area 44. The eighth display combination storage area 44 h is also referred to as the end of the display combination storage area 44.

  FIG. 10 (B) shows the state where the number of the main games executed until the latent state is finished is seven, and the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation. It is a figure which shows the case where it is performed. As shown in FIG. 10 (B), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the display combination set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h in the seventh display combination storage area 44g and the eighth display combination storage area. The display combination set at 44h is cleared. As shown in FIGS. 10B to 10H, the reel effect determining means 29 of the present embodiment has display combinations set in the second display combination storage area 44b to the eighth display combination storage area 44h. In other words, when the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation in the state where the number of times of the main game executed until the latent state is ended is 7 to 1 remaining, The display combination storage area for setting the display combination is configured to shift one byte at a time in the direction from the currently set display combination storage area toward the head (hereinafter referred to as “head direction”).

  FIG. 10 (F) shows that the main game is executed five times after the display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h, and the remaining number of main games executed until the latent state ends is three times. And the display combination currently set in the display combination storage area 44 is temporarily placed on the active line L1 during the execution of the first pseudo game of the first combo count out of the three first pseudo games determined by the combo lottery. It is a figure which shows the result of the process which the reel production | presentation determination means 29 performs, when start lever SL is started operation and the start switch 73 detects start operation in the state which is the display combination displayed by stop.

  In the case of shifting from the state shown in FIG. 10E to the state shown in FIG. 10F, the reel effect determination means 29 first displays the display combination set in the fourth display combination storage area 44d in the third display. Shift to the combination storing area 44c. At this time, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the display combination set in the third display combination storage area 44c is the display combination related to the first pseudo game to be executed last out of the number of combos determined by the combo lottery. Determine. When the reel effect determining means 29 determines that the display combination set in the third display combination storage area 44c is not the display combination related to the first pseudo game to be executed at the end of the number of combos, the eighth display combination is displayed. The display combination set in the storage area 44h is determined by the first pseudo game display combination lottery, and the determined display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h. In this specific example, the combo lottery determines that the combo count is 3 times, and the display combination set in the third display combination storage area 44c is not the last because it is the display combo associated with the first combo count 1st pseudo game. The display combination set in the combination storage area 44 changes from the state shown in FIG. 10E to the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 10 (I) shows the state of the display combination storage area 44 when the first pseudo game is executed. The reel effect determination means 29 moves to the latent state when the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation with the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. It is determined that eight times of the main game has been executed, the latent state is terminated, a freeze is generated, and the progress of the main game is delayed. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 processes the start signal output from the start switch 73 as a temporary start signal, and causes the reel control means 24 to start temporary rotation of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Based on the reel temporary stop signal output from the stop switch 74, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to temporarily stop the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 corresponding to the reel temporary stop signal. The first simulated game is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 10I, the reel effect determination means 29 shifts the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 in the head direction when the reel control means 24 executes the first pseudo game. It is configured not to. It should be noted that the reel effect determination means 29 has the first display combination when the display combination is set in at least one of the second display combination storage area 44b to the eighth display combination storage area 44h when the first pseudo game is executed. After temporarily stopping the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, the state shifts again to the latent state.

  FIG. 10 (J) shows that after the reel effect determining means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game and the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped, the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 shows the state of the display combination storing area 44 when the start operation is detected. In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 ends the freeze based on the start operation of the start lever SL and the start switch 73 detecting the start operation after the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped. In this way, processing related to the game is executed. As shown in FIG. 10 (J), when the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44, the reel effect determination means 29 shifts the display combination in the head direction and also displays the first display combination. The display combination set in the storage area 44a is configured to be cleared.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 10 (J) to 10 (N), the reel effect determining means 29, when the display combination is set in the second display combination storage area 44b to the sixth display combination storage area 44f, In other words, when the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation in the state where the number of times of the game executed until the latent state is ended is 5 to 1 remaining, The display combination storage area for setting is shifted by one byte from the currently set display combination storage area in the head direction. In addition, when the reel effect determining means 29 shifts from the state shown in FIG. 10 (K) to the state shown in FIG. 10 (L), the state shown in FIG. 10 (E) described above is shown in FIG. The same processing as in the case of shifting to the state is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10 (O), the reel effect determination means 29 starts the start lever SL and starts the start switch 73 with the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. If it is detected, it is determined that the game has been executed five times after the transition to the second latent state, and the latent state is terminated. In the same manner as in the state shown in FIG. The generated game is delayed to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game. In addition, after causing the reel control means 24 to execute the second first pseudo game, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the same processing as the processing after the first pseudo game shown in FIG. Then, the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 is set to the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the reel effect determination means 29 determines to execute the first pseudo game by reel effect lottery, the eighth display role is set so that the first pseudo game can be executed after the eight main games. The display lever is set in the storage area 44h, and the start lever SL is left in a state where the remaining number of executions of the game is three times until the latent state is completed until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos. Is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation, the display combination set in the fourth display combination storage area 44d is set in the third display combination storage area 44c and in the eighth display combination storage area 44h. Set a new display combination. Then, the reel effect determination means 29 stores the sixth display combination storage area 44f at the time when the first pseudo game is executed until the reel control means 24 executes the first pseudo game of the number of combos determined by the combo lottery. Based on the fact that the display combination is set, the reel control means 24 executes each first pseudo game and then shifts to a latent state. Each time one main game is executed, the second display combination storage area is displayed. By shifting the display combination set in 44b to 6th display combination storage area 44f in the head direction, the first and second pseudo games can be executed every time the main game is executed five times.

  In the first pseudo game display combination lottery in the state where the display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c, the reel effect determination means 29, when the set display combination is a weak rare combination, The lottery is executed with reference to the display combination lottery table B to determine the display combination. If the set display combination is a strong rare combination, the lottery is executed with reference to the display combination lottery table C. The display combination is determined. As shown in FIG. 9, the display combination lottery table B is set to have a high probability of winning a weak rare combination, and the display combination lottery table C is set to always win a strong rare combination.

  When the set display combination is a chance combination, the reel effect determination means 29 determines by drawing whether to display the display combination lottery table B or the display combination lottery table C, and determines the determined display combination. The first pseudo game display combination lottery is executed with reference to the lottery table. Then, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the determined display combination in the eighth display combination storage area 44h. If the reel effect determining means 29 determines that the first pseudo game is not to be executed once in the combo lottery, that is, if the winning combination is won in the first pseudo game display combination lottery, the third display combination When the chance combination is set in the storage area 44c, the combo lottery is executed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel effect determining means 29 stops in the clear replay batting order in the game won for the replay in the internal lottery with the display combination based on the first pseudo game set in the display combination storage area 44. When the button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed, it is determined that a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, and a re-lottery process as a pseudo game lottery is executed. In the re-lottery process, the reel effect determination means 29 clears (cancels) the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set to the OFF state, and performs the first display from the display combination storage area changed to the OFF state. Whether or not to set a display combination in each of the combination storage areas 44a is determined by a re-lottery process. For example, in the state where the display combination is set in the fourth display combination storage area 44d, when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the clear replay order in the game which is won by the internal lottery, the reel effect is determined. The means 29 cancels the display combination set in the fourth display combination storage area 44d and executes a re-lottery process for each of the first display combination storage area 44a to the fourth display combination storage area 44d. A display combination is set in the winning display combination storage area. Here, the probability of winning the display combination in the re-lottery process is the same as the probability of winning the pseudo game in the reel effect lottery in the first main effect state. In addition, when the display combination is won, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the first pseudo game display combination lottery with reference to the display combination lottery table A, and the weak rare combination, the strong rare combination, and the chance combination. It is determined which of the temporary stop display is possible.

  When executing the second pseudo game process, the reel effect determination means 29 first executes the second pseudo game display combination lottery as a symbol combination lottery in the game won for the pseudo game as the reel effect, and the selected display combination Is set in the eighth display combination storing area 44h. In the second pseudo game display combination lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the lottery with reference to the display combination lottery table D shown in FIG. 9 to determine the display combination. When the display combination is set in the second display combination storage area 44b to the eighth display combination storage area 44h, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set every time the game is executed. Shifts one byte at a time from the end to the head from the currently set display combination storage area.

  The game is executed eight times after the display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h, and the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 is started with the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. When the start operation is detected, the reel effect determination means 29 generates a freeze to delay the rotation of each reel, processes the start signal output from the start switch 73 as a temporary start signal, and sends it to the reel control means 24. The first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily started to rotate. Based on the reel temporary stop signal output from the stop switch 74, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to temporarily stop the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 corresponding to the reel temporary stop signal. The second pseudo game is executed. That is, when the reel effect determination means 29 determines that the reel control means 24 is to execute the second pseudo game by reel effect lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the display role in the eighth display role storage area 44h, thereby The second pseudo game that continues until the total number of executions reaches a predetermined number of games (eight in this embodiment) shifts to a latent state in which the second pseudo game is not executed, and a display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a. After the game is completed, the reel control means 24 is made to execute the second pseudo game.

  Further, the reel effect determination means 29 detects that the start switch 73 is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation in the game next to the game in which the main effect state has shifted from the first main effect state to the second main effect state. Based on the above, a freeze is generated to delay the rotation of each reel, and the second pseudo game start process is executed. When executing the second pseudo game start time process, the reel effect determination means 29 first sets the second pseudo game start time display combination in the first display combination storage area 44a. Here, as the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game, the symbol combination “BAR-BAR-BAR” composed of the BAR symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed on the invalid line including the middle of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. It is a symbol combination.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to start provisional rotation of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Based on the reel temporary stop signal output from the stop switch 74, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to temporarily stop the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 corresponding to the reel temporary stop signal. The second pseudo game start process is executed. In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 constitutes the second pseudo game start display combination when the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped regardless of the pressing timing of the stop buttons B1 to B3. The reel control means 24 is controlled so as to display the symbol temporarily.

  The reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not to continue the second pseudo game start time process by the second pseudo game start time continuous lottery process when the second pseudo game start time process is executed three times. When it is determined in the second pseudo game start continuous lottery process that the second pseudo game start time process is not to be continued (non-winning), the second pseudo game start time process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 is in a state where the display combination based on the second pseudo game is set in the display combination storage area 44, and the main effect state changes from the second main effect state to the first main effect. When the state is shifted to the state, the display combination storage area 44 is cleared, that is, the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the eighth display combination storage area 44h is erased and the second pseudo game determined Is configured to stop execution.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 stops in the clear replay batting order in the game won by the internal lottery with the display combination based on the second pseudo game set in the display combination storage area 44. When the button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed, it is determined that a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, and a re-lottery process as a pseudo game lottery is executed. In the re-lottery process, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set to the OFF state, cancels the display combination, and changes from the display combination storage area changed to the OFF state to the first display combination storage area 44a. Whether or not to set the display combination is determined by the re-lottery process. Here, the probability of winning the display combination in the re-lottery process is the same as the probability of winning the pseudo game in the reel effect lottery in the second main effect state. If the display combination is won, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the second pseudo game display combination lottery to determine which of the weak rare combination and the strong rare combination can be displayed temporarily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 has the main effect state in the second main effect state, and in the game won for replay in the internal lottery, the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the strike order of the high-accuracy transition replay. Is pressed, the display combination lottery table referred to when the second pseudo game display combination lottery is executed is changed from the display combination lottery table D to the display combination lottery table E. As shown in FIG. 9, the display combination lottery table E has a higher probability of winning a strong rare combination than the display combination lottery table D. In the reel effect determination means 29, the main effect state is the second main effect state, and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the hit order of the high-precision end replay in the game where the replay is won by the internal lottery. In this case, the display combination lottery table referred to when the second pseudo game display combination lottery is executed is changed from the display combination lottery table E to the display combination lottery table D.

  When executing the third simulated game process, the reel effect determination means 29 first starts the start lever SL and starts the start switch 73 in the next game in which the main effect state has shifted to the third main effect state. Based on the detection, the freeze is generated to delay the rotation of each reel, the third pseudo game display combination lottery is executed as the special symbol combination lottery, and the third pseudo as the special symbol combination determined to be won The game display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a. In the third pseudo game display combination lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the lottery with reference to the display combination lottery table F shown in FIG. 9, and determines whether the third pseudo game display combination is successful. Here, the third pseudo game display combination is a symbol combination “red 7-red 7-red 7” composed of a red 7 symbol “red 7” on an invalid line consisting of the middle of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. ”Is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination“ BAR− ”is composed of the BAR symbol“ BAR ”on the invalid line consisting of the middle stages of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. It is comprised from the 3rd pseudo game display combination (BAR alignment) on which "BAR-BAR" is displayed. In addition, when the third pseudo game display combination lottery is not won (lost), the reel effect determining means 29 displays the red 7 symbol “red 7” on the middle of the first reel R1 and the third reel R3. The second reel R2 has a suspend symbol display (7 strokes) that temporarily displays a symbol other than the red 7 symbol on the middle stage of the second reel R2, and the BAR symbol “BAR” temporarily stops on the middle stage of the first reel R1 and the third reel R3. Displayed and selected as a display combination with a display combination other than a BAR display in which a symbol other than the BAR symbol is temporarily displayed in the middle of the second reel R2.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to start provisional rotation of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Here, the reel control means 24 rotates the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 a predetermined number of times based on the result of the third pseudo game display combination lottery, and then rotates the first reel R1 and the third reel R3. The temporary stop is performed, and the same symbol (“red 7” or “BAR”) constituting the third pseudo game display combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first reel R1 and the third reel R3.

  Then, the reel effect determination means 29 makes the reel control means 24 temporarily stop the second reel R2 based on the reel temporary stop signal output from the stop switch 74 when the stop button B2 is pressed. 3 Simulated game is executed. In the present embodiment, when the third pseudo game display combination is won as the display combination, the reel effect determination means 29 does not depend on the pressing timing of the stop button B2, but the third pseudo game display combination at the temporary stop of the second reel R2. The reel control means 24 is controlled so as to temporarily stop and display the symbols constituting. When the start lever SL is started and the start signal is output from the start switch 73 after the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped, the reel effect determination means 29 resumes the third pseudo game. The third pseudo game ends when the third pseudo game display combination is won four times in succession or when the third pseudo game is executed five times as a predetermined number of times. In this way, a series of second pseudo game display combination lotteries are executed in which the third pseudo game display combination lottery is executed in which the third pseudo game display combination is won at the start of rotation of each reel. Three pseudo games constitute a special reel effect in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 changes the setting provided in the slot machine 1 with the display combination based on the first to third pseudo games set in the display combination storage area 44. Even when a switch (not shown) is operated and the setting is changed, it is determined that a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, and a re-lottery process is executed. The re-lottery process executed when the setting is changed is the clear replay batting order in the game in which the replay is won in the internal lottery with the display combination based on the first pseudo game set in the display combination storage area 44 described above. This is the same as the re-lottery process executed when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed.

  The reel effect determination means 29 generates a freeze when the reel effect other than the pseudo game is won in the reel effect lottery, and executes the above-described reel lock or reverse rotation. In addition, the reel effect determining means 29, as a reel effect, when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed down in the order of special extra replay in the game won for the replay, the first reel R1 to the first reel a plurality of times. The three reels R3 are rotated and stopped, and after the first rotation stop, each reel is turned on when receiving a bet signal output based on the detection of the bet switch 72 that the max bet button MB is pressed. It has a special addition effect that starts rotation. Here, the special addition special effect is when the bet switch 72 detects that the first bet R1 to the third reel R3 are rotated and stopped, and the max bet button MB is pressed while each reel is stopped. In addition, the special reel effect of special addition that rotates and stops each reel again is performed a plurality of times (three times in the present embodiment) or more.

  The effect control means 30 performs control related to the display effect performed using the display device 81 and the sound effect performed using the audio device 83 based on the effect data stored in the storage unit 40, for example. Specifically, when the player operates the respective components of the slot machine 1 for the operation of the medal insertion, the single bet button BT, the maximum bet button MB, the start lever SL, the stop button B1 to the stop button B3, or the like When a game event such as a state change occurs, the lamp or LED is turned on or blinking, the display content of the display device 81 is changed, the sound is output from the speaker, etc., and the game is boosted or the game is assisted. The execution control for the production is performed. In addition, when the reel effect determining means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the pseudo game, the effect control means 30 informs the display device 81 that the pseudo game is currently being executed, such as “pseudo game is being executed”. The display effect shown is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the effect control means 30 has a plurality of effect states, and performs execution control of the various effects described above based on the effect states set in the effect state storage area 48. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a normal effect state, a plurality of CZ states, and a plurality of assist time states (hereinafter referred to as “AT state”) as special effect states as the effect states.

  The normal effect state is an effect state that corresponds to the initial state among a plurality of effect states, and is an effect state that continues until a transition is made to another effect state. In the normal effect state, the effect control means 30 executes the AT state transition lottery as the effect lottery regarding the AT state when the game state is a bonus establishment state and the pseudo combination is executed and the display combination can be displayed temporarily. A CZ transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the CZ state is executed. In this way, the symbol combination (RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)) constituting the weak rare role that triggers the execution of the CZ transition lottery and the symbol combination (RPA (RPB) -BLB-) constituting the strong rare role. RPA (RPB)) constitutes an opportunity symbol combination in the present embodiment. The production control means 30 may be configured to execute the CZ transition lottery even when the game state is the normal state and the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay can be stopped and displayed in this game. When configured as described above, the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay, which are the execution chances of the CZ transition lottery, constitute an opportunity in the present embodiment.

  Further, in the normal performance state, the performance control means 30 is based on the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a of the storage unit 40 when the reel presentation determination means 29 executes the first pseudo game process. While performing the CZ transition lottery process or the AT transition lottery process as the effect lottery, the CZ transition lottery process is executed based on the value of the combo continuation counter stored in the counter storage means 43 of the storage unit 40.

  Further, the effect control means 30 sets the display combination in any one of the first display combination storage area 44a to the eighth display combination storage area 44h, and the execution of the first pseudo game is the reel effect determination means. The first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 until the latent state where the state in which the first pseudo game is not executed is continued until the main game is executed 8 times after the determination of 29 is completed. The suggestion production which suggests is performed. In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 performs the first pseudo game as the reel control means 24 when the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area 44e as the suggestion presentation. It is suggested that the number of times of the main game necessary until the execution of the first pseudo game is predicted in advance, and that the reel effect determination means 29 has shifted to the latent state. As a trigger, a roaring effect that suggests that a pre-reading effect may be executed is executed. In other words, when the reel effect determining unit 29 starts executing the process related to the first first pseudo game and shifts to the latent state, the effect control unit 30 of the present embodiment first starts the turn effect, and in the latent state The pre-reading effect is started after three main games are executed. Further, the effect control means 30 executes the five main games executed in the latent state where the reel effect determination means 29 executes again after the execution of each first pseudo game until the reel effect determination means 29 executes the first pseudo game of the number of combos. During the pre-reading effect.

  At the time of execution of the prefetch effect, the effect control means 30 causes the display device 81 to display a prefetch display area 82 (see FIG. 1). The prefetch display area 82 includes a first prefetch display area 82a to a fifth prefetch display area 82e. When the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a, the effect control means 30 displays the pseudo game suggestion symbol in the first prefetch display area 82a and the display combination in the second display combination storage area 44b. When set, a pseudo game suggestion symbol is displayed in the second prefetch display area 82b, and when a display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c, a pseudo game suggestion is displayed in the third prefetch display area 82c. When a symbol is displayed and a display combination is set in the fourth display combination storage area 44d, a pseudo game suggestion display is displayed in the fourth prefetch display area 82d, and a display combination is set in the fifth display combination storage area 44e. If it is, the pseudo game suggestion symbol is displayed in the fifth prefetch display area 82e.

  As described above, when the display combination is set in the second display combination storage area 44b to the fifth display combination storage area 44e, the reel effect determination is performed each time the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation. The means 29 moves the display combination by 1 byte in the head direction of the display combination storage area 44 every time the game is executed. Therefore, the effect control means 30 displays the pseudo game suggestion pattern every time the game is executed. The prefetch display area to be displayed is moved by one prefetch display area from the fifth prefetch display area 82e toward the first prefetch display area 82a. Then, the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 is started in a state where the display combination is set in the first display combination storing area 44a, that is, in the state where the pseudo game suggestion symbol is displayed in the first prefetch display area 82a. The reel effect determination means 29 is configured to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game. That is, the effect control means 30 determines that the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game, and shifts to a latent state that continues until eight main games are executed. In a game executed until the latent state ends (in this embodiment, a game from five times before the latent state ends), the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set is displayed every time the game is executed. Corresponding to moving one byte at a time in the leading direction of the combination storing area 44, the pseudo game suggestion symbols displayed in the prefetch display area 82 are changed from the fifth prefetch display area 82e to the first prefetch display area for each game. By moving one prefetch display area in the direction of 82a, a prefetch effect that suggests that the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 is executed in the prefetch display area 82 of the display device 81. Is constructed sea urchin.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute the CZ transition lottery as an effect lottery regarding the AT state, which is a privilege advantageous for the player, when the display combination can be displayed temporarily. When the game state is a bonus establishment state by the control means 24, the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay are set to be non-stop displayable, so that there is a high probability that the temporary stop display is possible than when the game is executed. When it is determined that the reel control means 24 is to execute the first pseudo game, the game shifts to a latent state that continues until the eight main games are executed, and the first pseudo game is executed after the latent state ends. At the same time, the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 in the present game which is executed after the reel effect determining means 29 shifts to the latent state and ends the latent state. To run the suggestive look ahead produce a Rukoto. As a result, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of executions from the game determined to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game until the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24. It is possible to continuously give a sense of expectation for the provision of an advantageous privilege throughout the game.

  In addition, as described above, when the reel effect determination means 29 determines to execute the first pseudo game by the reel effect lottery, the reel effect determination means 29 is configured to execute the first pseudo game after the eight main games. The display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44h, and the remaining number of executions of the game that is necessary until the latent state is completed is three times until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos. Each time a display combination is set in the combination storage area 44c, a display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h. Then, the reel effect determination means 29 stores the fifth display combination storage area 44e at the time when the first pseudo game is executed until the reel control means 24 executes the first pseudo game of the number of combos determined by the combo lottery. Based on the fact that the display combination is set, each first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means, and then the latent game is shifted to the latent state, so that the first and subsequent first pseudo games are executed five times. Can be executed every time.

  That is, the effect control means 30 determines that the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game, and shifts to a latent state that continues until eight main games are executed. In a game executed until the latent state ends (in this embodiment, a game from five times before the latent state ends), the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set is displayed every time the game is executed. Corresponding to moving one byte at a time in the leading direction of the combination storing area 44, the pseudo game suggestion symbols displayed in the prefetch display area 82 are changed from the fifth prefetch display area 82e to the first prefetch display area for each game. By moving one prefetch display area in the direction of 82a, a prefetch effect that suggests that the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 is executed in the prefetch display area 82 of the display device 81. In both cases, when the number of executions of the first pseudo game is less than the number of combos, the display combination is set in the fifth display combination storage area 44e after the latent state is finished and the first pseudo game is executed. Based on the above, by displaying the pseudo game suggestion symbol in the fifth prefetch display area 82e when shifting to the latent state again, the prefetch effect is continuously executed until the number of executions of the first pseudo game becomes the number of combos. It is configured.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the CZ transition lottery as an effect lottery regarding the AT state, which is a privilege advantageous for the player, when the display combination can be displayed temporarily. When the gaming state is a bonus establishment state by the control means 24, the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay are set to be unable to be stopped and displayed so that the display combination can be temporarily stopped and displayed as compared with the execution of this game. When it is determined that the reel control means 24 is to execute a pseudo game with a high probability, the first pseudo game is executed after the latent state that continues until the eight main games are executed, and in the latent state, In this game to be executed, a pre-reading effect that suggests that the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 is executed. Then, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos determined by the combo lottery, and then shifts to the latent state. Thus, the prefetch effect is continuously executed until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos. Thereby, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control unit 24 is determined by combo lottery from the game determined to cause the reel control unit 24 to execute the first pseudo game. It is possible to continuously give a sense of expectation for the provision of an advantageous privilege over the game executed in a plurality of latent states executed until the number of combos is reached.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 in a state in which the display state is determined to shift from the normal display state to the CZ state, the display control unit 30 performs replay by internal lottery. The winning game is configured to perform a batting order notification effect for notifying the batting order of the clear replay. As described above, the reel effect determination means 29 performs the re-lottery operation in the state where the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 and the clear replay batting order is pressed in the game won for the replay in the internal lottery. It is configured to perform processing. The effect control means 30 determines that the effect state shifts from the normal effect state to the CZ state, and when the re-lottery process is executed or when the display combination is not set in the display combination storage area 44, various controls in the CZ state Execute the process. For this reason, since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is in a state where the pre-reading effect is being executed in the normal effect state and the effect state is shifted to the CZ state, the re-lottery process is executed. When the game is executed and the display combination can be displayed temporarily stopped, the winning probability of the AT transition lottery in the second CZ state (described later) configured to have a high probability of winning the AT transition lottery is also selected as another CZ state (first CZ state). State, the third CZ state) and the winning probability is substantially the same.

  With this configuration, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 from when it is determined that the pseudo control is to be executed by the reel control means 24 until the pseudo game is executed. In the state, as a predetermined cancellation condition, the pseudo-fix that has been determined when the stop switch 74 detects that the replay is won by the internal lottery and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the clear replay batting order. By canceling the game and executing a re-lottery process to determine whether or not to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the pseudo game, the pseudo game determined before the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied When the condition is satisfied, it is canceled once, and it is determined again whether or not the reel control means 24 is executed by the re-lottery process. Prevent the occurrence of cracking control process, it is possible to prevent damaging the interest in the game of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 has a normal pseudo game suggestion symbol for notifying the player that the pseudo game is executed in the game displayed in the first prefetch display area 82a as the pseudo game suggestion symbol, 1 When a pseudo game is executed in the game displayed in the pre-read display area 82a, it is possible to display a strong rare combination as a special display combination that triggers the execution of the AT shift lottery process as a display combination. Special pseudo game suggestion symbols to be notified to the person. Further, the effect control means 30 displays a symbol different from the pseudo game suggestion symbol in the prefetch display area where the pseudo game suggestion symbol is not displayed when the prefetch effect is executed.

  The CZ state is an effect state that shifts when winning the CZ transition lottery process executed when the effect state is the normal effect state, and any one of the first CZ state to the third CZ state is given to the player. When there is a normal CZ state to be selected and a special CZ state, the AT transition lottery process is executed, and when the AT transition lottery process is won, the selected AT state is entered and before the AT transition lottery process is won When the end condition set in each CZ state is satisfied, the process shifts to the normal performance state. The effect control means 30 executes the CZ state selection notification effect that causes the player to select any one of the first CZ state to the third CZ state after the game in which the transition condition to the normal CZ state is satisfied.

  In the first CZ state, whether or not to increase the winning probability in the AT transition lottery process based on the winning combination or display combination for each game is determined by the probability product lottery process, and a predetermined number of games (for example, This is a CZ state in which the AT transition lottery process is executed based on the winning probability determined by the probability product lottery process after the game of 15 games).

  The second CZ state is a CZ state in which AT transition lottery processing is executed for each game based on the winning combination or display combination, and every time a game of a preset number of games (for example, 10 games) is executed. A game AT transition lottery process is executed. In the present embodiment, the second CZ state is configured such that the winning probability of the AT transition lottery based on the display combination is higher than the winning probability of the AT transition lottery based on the winning combination.

In the third CZ state, when the player presses the enter button JGB, the effect signal output from the decision switch 76 and transmitted as the input command from the operation accepting means 28 is accumulated, and AT transition lottery is performed using the accumulated value. This is a CZ state in which processing is executed. The effect control means 30 determines that a predetermined detection condition is satisfied when the effect state shifts from the normal effect state to the CZ state and the third CZ state is selected, and the determination switch 76 shifts to the detection state. The effect signal output from the decision switch 76 and transmitted as an input command from the operation receiving means 28 can be detected. The effect control means 30 executes a push operation instruction effect that causes the player to press the decision button JGB in the game that has started the third CZ state, and the decision button JGB is pushed and an effect signal is output from the decision switch 76. Each time the operation command receiving means 28 outputs, it shifts to a detection state where it can detect the input command.
Transition to the correct detection state.

  Then, each time the determination button JGB is pressed down and the input command is output from the operation accepting unit 28, the effect control unit 30 adds 1 to the effect accumulation counter of the counter storage unit 43 of the storage unit 40 and adds the effect accumulation counter. Whether or not to continue the addition process to be performed is determined by the pressing continuation lottery as the operation continuation lottery. The effect control means 30 informs the player that the addition process has ended when the push-down continuation lottery means 30a decides not to continue the addition process, that is, does not continue the detection state, and the effect accumulation counter in the next game. The AT shift lottery process is executed based on the value of.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is based on the fact that the determination switch 76 detects the pressing operation when the production state shifts from the normal production state to the CZ state and the third CZ state is selected. The winning probability in the AT transition lottery is determined, and the player's expectation for the subsequent effect can be changed by the pressing operation by the player detected by the determination switch 76, and the player's effect on the effect of the player can be changed. Can be improved.

  When it is determined that the addition process is to be continued, the stop switch 74 which is an operation detection unit other than the jog dial JG detects the pressing operation of the stop buttons B1 to B3, and the reel control unit 24 causes the first reel. When the game has progressed by stopping the R1 to the third reel R3, the automatic continuation lottery process 30b included in the effect control means 30 performs an addition process and an automatic continuation lottery process similar to the pressing operation continuation lottery process. Is automatically executed, and AT shift lottery processing is executed.

  With this configuration, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stop switch 74 detects the pressing operation of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in a state where the detection condition is satisfied, and the reel control means 24 performs the first reel R1 to the third reel. Even if the game has progressed by stopping the reel R3, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b executes the automatic continuation lottery and the automatic continuation lottery is determined based on the determination that the detection state is continued in the automatic continuation lottery. Since the means 30b causes the effect control means 30 to determine the winning probability of the AT transition lottery, the expectation for the subsequent effects can be changed even for the player who has advanced the game in a state where the detection condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest in the player's performance.

  As described above, the determination switch 76 that shifts to the detection state in which it is possible to detect that the determination button JGB has been pressed when the production state shifts to the third CZ state and a predetermined detection condition is satisfied, The specific operation detecting means is configured. In addition, the AT transition based on the stored value of the counter storage means 43 having the effect accumulation counter 43 that counts the cumulative number of times that the determination switch 76 detects the pressing operation until the pressing continuation lottery means 30a determines that the detection state is not continued. The effect control means 30 that determines the winning probability of the lottery constitutes the probability determination means in the present embodiment.

  In the special CZ state, every time the third pseudo game display combination is won as the display combination in the third pseudo game process, after the special CZ state is completed, a bonus effect process based on an effect mode more advantageous to the player with respect to the provision of game media is executed. The CZ state is changed to the AT state. When the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to the special CZ state as the effect state, the main effect state is transferred to the third main effect state, so that it is transmitted from the reel effect determining means 29 when the third pseudo game process is executed. The effect control means 30 is caused to execute various processes in the special CZ state based on the start command.

  In the special CZ state, when the third pseudo game display combination is won once, the production control means 30 decides to shift the production state to the AT state after the special CZ state ends, and twice the third pseudo game display combination. If the winning is won, after the special CZ state is finished, the effect state is shifted to the AT state, the first effect mode is selected, and the AT storage number of the counter storage means 43 is added to a predetermined value (for example, 100). Is added (hereinafter referred to as “addition” to add the stored value of the AT number addition counter), and when the third pseudo game display combination is won three times, The second effect mode is selected, and as the bonus effect processing by the above-described additional notification effect and the second effect mode, the effect state that transitions after the end of the special CZ state is added as the special state, and the third simulation is performed four times. A privilege effect process of selecting a first effect mode, a second effect mode, and a third effect mode and adding a predetermined value to the stored value of the above-mentioned AT number addition counter when the technique display combination is won; As a special effect process in the third effect mode, a special effect state is added to the effect state that transitions after the end of the special CZ state, and as a special effect process in the second effect mode, the effect state is set after the special add-on state ends. Transition to the specialization state. Here, the expected value of the added value in the added special state is configured to be higher than the predetermined value added when the first effect mode is selected. Further, the expected value of the value added in the special special state is configured to be higher than the expected value of the value added in the special special state. That is, the first effect mode to the third effect mode are configured such that the degree of advantage for the player with respect to the provision of the game medium varies stepwise.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the bonus effect processing based on any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes according to the number of times the third pseudo game display combination is won during the execution of the third pseudo game. Since it is determined whether or not to execute when the state is shifted to the state, and the third pseudo game is continuously executed, the effect mode selected when the state is always shifted to the AT state during the execution of the third pseudo game. A sense of expectation can be given to the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the more the number of times the third pseudo game display combination is won during the execution of the third pseudo game, the more advantageous to the player regarding the provision of game media when the game machine enters the AT state. In order to execute the bonus effect process based on the effect mode, the expectation given to the player during the consecutive third pseudo game increases every time the third pseudo game display role is won, so the player's interest in the game is further improved. Can be made. In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special reel effect is configured by the third pseudo game that is a pseudo game that allows the player to experience the game in a pseudo manner, so that the player can perform the third pseudo game at the time of executing the third pseudo game. The game can be executed in a pseudo manner, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the third pseudo game that is continuously executed, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the production control means 30 executes the special CZ internal lottery when the third pseudo game display combination is not won in the special CZ state, and stores the counter when the special CZ internal lottery is won. A process of adding 1 to the special CZ internal winning counter of the means 43 is executed. At the end of the special CZ state, the effect control unit 30 stores the stored value of the special CZ internal winning counter and the stored value of the special CZ winning counter of the counter storing unit 43 that is added each time the third pseudo game display combination is won. When the sum is 4 or more, the third pseudo game display combination is treated as being won four times. With this configuration, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is most advantageous to the player regarding the provision of game media among the plurality of effect modes even when the third pseudo game display combination is not won in the third pseudo game. There is a possibility that a different production mode is selected, and it is possible to always give the player a sense of expectation when executing the special CZ state executed a plurality of times, and to improve the interest in the game.

  The AT state is an effect state that shifts when the AT shift lottery process is won. In the AT state, when the winning order bell 1 to the hitting order bell 8 is won, the effect control means 30 executes a winning auxiliary effect for informing the correct hit order for winning the winning combination with the winning prizes Bell A and Bell B. When the medals are paid out by winning the bell A and the bell B, the effect control means 30 uses the stored value of the AT number counter stored in the counter storage means 43 as the number of paid out medals (this implementation) A process of subtracting only a value (5 in the present embodiment) obtained by subtracting the specified insertion number (3 in the present embodiment) from 8 in the embodiment is executed. When the number of medals satisfies the AT end condition, that is, when the stored value of the AT number counter becomes 0, the effect control means 30 ends the AT state and shifts the effect state to the normal effect state. In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 30 is configured to be able to change the AT end condition by adding the stored value of the AT number counter at the start of the AT state or each process during the AT state. In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 is a pseudo bonus as an AT state at the start of the AT state, a normal AT state, a normal added state, an added special state, a special added special state, and a privilege state. State.

  At the start of the AT state, it is an AT state that is executed in the first game in which the effect state has shifted to the AT state. At the start of the AT state, the effect control means 30 determines a value to be set in the AT number counter based on the number of times that the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game is won, and sets the AT end condition. In the normal AT state, the lottery determines whether or not to shift to another AT state based on the winning combination or the display combination, and the AT state for lottering whether to change the winning probability of the display combination in the pseudo game in the AT state It is. The normal addition state, the addition special state, and the special addition special state are AT states in which the value determined by the addition lottery process is added to the AT number addition counter. Note that the expected value of the added value in the normal added state, the added special state, and the special added special state is higher in the added special state than in the normal added state, and the special added special value than the added special state. The state is configured to be higher.

  The pseudo bonus state is an effect state in which the transition is made in the case of winning the pseudo bonus transition lottery executed when the rendering state is the normal AT state and the display combination is set in the display combination storing area 44a. It is an AT state composed of a normal pseudo bonus state that allows the player to select one of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state as a state, and a special pseudo bonus state as a special privilege state Then, a pseudo bonus addition process is executed as a privilege control process for determining whether or not to give an addition to the AT number addition counter as a privilege related to the AT state. The effect control means 30 selects one of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state for the player in which the conditions for transition to the normal pseudo bonus state are satisfied, each of which has a different pseudo bonus addition configuration. The pseudo bonus state selection notification effect to be executed is executed.

  The first pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus state in which a first pseudo bonus effect informing that there is a possibility that the pseudo bonus extra process may be executed as the pseudo bonus extra process. When a game (for example, 50 games) is executed, the game ends and the normal AT state is entered.

  The second pseudo bonus state is terminated when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are executed as the pseudo bonus addition process, and when the state shifts to the normal AT state, This is a pseudo-bonus state in which a value to be added is determined based on the stored value of the additional coefficient counter and the stored value of the additional magnification counter, and the stored value of the additional coefficient counter and the stored value of the additional magnification counter are respectively the winning role or the display role. Is added by.

  The third pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus state in which a third pseudo bonus effect informing that the pseudo bonus extra process is executed is executed as the pseudo bonus extra process, and a preset number of games (for example, 20 When the game (game) is executed, the game ends and the normal AT state is entered.

  The special pseudo bonus state is an effect state that shifts when the transition to the special pseudo bonus state is won as a predetermined effect state transition condition, and each of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state in one game This is a pseudo bonus state in which the pseudo bonus addition process executed in is performed at the same time, and when a game of a preset number of games (for example, 40 games) is executed, the process is terminated and the normal AT state is entered.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of pseudo bonus states as the production state, and the special pseudo transition that is performed when the transition to the special pseudo bonus state among the plurality of pseudo bonus states is won. By configuring the pseudo bonus extra process executed in the bonus state from the pseudo bonus extra process set for each of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus extra process for the special pseudo bonus state is performed. Without providing separately, it can be configured as a pseudo bonus state different from the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state, and various games can be realized without increasing the data amount.

  Here, as described above, the reel effect determining means 29 is in a state in which the display combination based on the second pseudo game is set in the display combination storage area 44, and the main effect state is changed from the second main effect state to the first main effect. When the state is shifted to the state, the display combination storage area 44 is cleared, and the execution of the determined second pseudo game is stopped. In other words, the effect control means 30 executes the pseudo bonus transition lottery when the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a after the game is executed a plurality of times and the second pseudo game is executed in the reel control means 24. If the stop order determination means 24a is not in a predetermined stop order in which the bell A and the bell B can be won at the time of winning the hit order bell group 1 or the hit order bell group 2, When the determination is made, the execution schedule of the pseudo bonus transition lottery is canceled.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the second pseudo game is to be executed after the number of executions of the main game is eight times after the transition to the latent state, and the second pseudo game is executed. The stop operation sequence detected by the stop switch 74 until the stop order determination unit 24a determines that the order of hitting in which the bell A and the bell B cannot be won is determined. By canceling the execution, as a method unintended by the designer of the slot machine 1, for example, the production state is the assist time state, and it is possible to win the bell A and the bell B that pay out more medals than the prescribed number of inserted coins. In spite of execution of the winning assistance effect that informs the pressing order of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3, the stop buttons B1 to B1 are performed in a batting order that does not follow the winning assistance effect. When the top button B3 is pressed, the execution of the second pseudo game can be prevented by stopping the execution of the second pseudo game and preventing the pseudo bonus transition lottery from being executed due to the execution of the second pseudo game. Can be effectively executed in accordance with game playability, the game play can be prevented from being impaired, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  The storage unit 40 stores various data tables and programs used when the control unit 11 executes various calculations using a configuration corresponding to the progress of the game, and also stores various calculations performed by the control unit 11. It has an area for storing results.

  The table storage unit 41 stores a data table used when the control unit 11 executes various calculations. The data table includes, for example, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 3) referred to by the internal lottery means 23 when executing the internal lottery process, and a reel effect lottery table referred to by the reel effect determining means 29 when executing the reel effect lottery process ( Etc.). The control unit 11 refers to various flags set in the flag storage area 42, values of various counters stored in the counter storage unit 43, etc., and stores a plurality of data tables stored in the table storage unit 41. Select the data table required for various processes.

  The flag storage area 42 stores execution results of various calculations by setting flag data corresponding to the results of the various calculations performed by the control unit 11 (ON state). The flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is, for example, a combo flag that is set until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of continuous executions when the reel effect determination means 29 executes the first pseudo game process. And a combo end flag that is set when the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of continuous executions. The control unit 11 refers to various flags set in the flag storage area 42 and determines processing to be executed at the time of various calculations.

  The counter storage unit 43 stores values counted when the control unit 11 executes various calculations. The counter stored in the counter storage unit 43 includes, for example, a combo counter that stores a value counted as the number of continuous executions of the first pseudo game when the reel effect determination unit 29 executes the first pseudo game process. A combo continuation counter that stores a value counted as the number of times the first pseudo game has been executed in the first pseudo game process is included. The control unit 11 performs a counting process necessary for various calculations by adding or subtracting a value set in a corresponding counter of the counter storage unit 43 when performing various calculations.

  As described above, the display combination storage area 44 is composed of an 8-byte area of the first display combination storage area 44a to the eighth display combination storage area 44h. When a game process is executed, a display combination that can be displayed on the effective line L1 when the reels are temporarily stopped is stored. The reel effect determination means 29 executes various processes based on the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 when executing the first pseudo game process to the third pseudo game process.

  The reel effect storage area 45 stores the reel effect determined by the reel effect determining means 29. As described above, the reel effects stored in the reel effect storage area 45 include a pseudo game, a reel lock effect, a reverse rotation effect, a special addition special effect, and the like. The reel effect determination unit 29 controls the reel control unit 24 to execute the reel effect set in the reel effect storage area 45.

  The gaming state storage area 46 stores a gaming state that is referred to when the control unit 11 executes various calculations. As described above, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 46 includes a normal state, a bonus establishment state, and a bonus state, and the normal state is set in the initial state. The game control means 27 sets the gaming state already set in the gaming state storage area 46 to the OFF state and sets the gaming state for which the transition condition is satisfied (to ON state) when the transition conditions for each gaming state are satisfied. To do.

  The main effect state storage area 47 stores the main effect state that is referred to when the reel effect determination means 29 executes each pseudo game. As described above, the main effect states stored in the main effect state storage area 47 include the first main effect state to the third main effect state, and the first main effect state is set in the initial state. The game control means 27 turns off the main effect state already set in the main effect state storage area 47 when the transition condition for each main effect state is satisfied, and sets the main effect state for which the transition condition is satisfied ( (ON state).

  The effect state storage area 48 stores effect states that are referred to when the effect control means 30 executes various calculations. As described above, the effect states stored in the effect state storage area 48 include the normal effect state, the CZ state having the first CZ state to the third CZ state and the special CZ state, the AT state start time, the normal AT state, and the normal state. There are an added state, an added special state, a special added special state, an AT state having a first pseudo bonus state to a third pseudo bonus state and a special pseudo bonus state, and a normal performance state is set in the initial state. . The production control means 30 sets the production state already set in the production state storage area 48 to the OFF state and sets the production state in which the migration condition is established (in the ON state) when the production condition transition conditions are established. To do. In the case of shifting from the AT state to the pseudo bonus state, the effect control means 30 is configured to set the pseudo bonus state while keeping the already set AT state.

  Note that the functional block configuration of the present embodiment can also be applied to a computer system (including a game system). In these systems, the function can be realized by downloading a program that causes the computer to function as the present embodiment from an information storage medium such as a CD or DVD or a Web server on the Internet via a network. In the computer system, the medal insertion switch 71, the bet switch 72, the start switch 73, the stop switch 74, the dial unit 75, the decision switch 76, and the like are used as operation means such as a keyboard, a pointing device (mouse, etc.), or a controller. On the other hand, these functions can be virtually allocated. In the computer system, the reel unit 78, the hopper unit 79, and the like are not essential constituent requirements. These device units can virtually realize their functions by controlling images displayed on the display (display device 81).

2. In this embodiment, the winning combination of the small role in each gaming state is shifted to a bonus establishment state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than the normal state by winning the BB, and a bonus establishment in which either the small role or replay is won in each game. In the state, by giving the opportunity to shift the production state to the AT state, the game state is a bonus establishment state and the game in which the production state is the AT state, the winning rate of the bell A and the bell B is increased and the game Employs a technique that allows a person to win a medal. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to a detailed setting example of the winning probability in the internal lottery in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG.

  First, in the present embodiment, as described above, only when Bell A and Bell B win a prize, eight medals larger than the prescribed insertion number (three) are paid out to increase the number of medals held by the player. be able to. In the bonus establishment state, as shown in FIG. 12A, the probability that at least one of bell A or bell B is won is 35600/65536 (approximately 1 / 1.8). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the bonus state, as shown in FIG. 12B, the probability that at least one of Bell A and Bell B is won is 17800/65536 (about 1 / 3.7). That is, in the present embodiment, the probability that a winning mode including a small combination (Bell A, Bell B) in which more medals are paid out in the bonus state is obtained is determined in the normal state and the bonus establishment state. It is compressed to about 1/2 of the probability of obtaining a winning mode including. As described above, in the normal state and the bonus established state, the internal lottery is performed by providing a mode in which a small combination in which more medals than N types of predetermined inserted numbers are paid out is not overlapped with each other, and in the bonus state Probability that a winning mode including a specific small role can be obtained in the bonus state by providing an internal lottery by providing a mode in which a small role for which more medals than N types of specified insertion numbers are paid out is selected. Can be compressed to about 1 / N (about 1/2 in the present embodiment) of the probability that a winning mode including a specific small role is obtained in the normal state and the bonus establishment state.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the probability of winning any of the small roles in the bonus state is 36256/65536 (about 1 / 1.8). In the state and the bonus establishment state, the internal lottery is performed so as to be higher than 36255/65536 (about 1 / 1.8) which is a probability that a winning mode of any small role is obtained. In the bonus state, the probability of winning one of the special small roles A1 to A4, the special small roles B1, the special small roles B2 or the missing role is 18456/65536 (about 1 / 3.6). 8900/65536 (about 1 / 7.4) which is the probability of winning one of the special small roles A1 to A4 in the normal state and the bonus established state, any of the special small roles B1 and B2 The internal lottery is performed so that it is higher than either 17800/65536 (about 1 / 3.7) which is the probability of winning or 655/65536 (about 1 / 100.1) which is the probability of winning the missing part. Yes. By configuring in this way, in the bonus state, the winning probabilities of each of the special small roles A1 to A4, special small roles B1, special small roles B2 and missed roles are higher than in the normal state or the bonus establishment state. In addition, the winning probability of the entire small role is also higher than the normal state or the bonus establishment state. 65536 (approx. 1 / 3.7)) is lower than the probability (35600/65536 (approx. 1 / 1.8)) that at least one winning mode of Bell A or Bell B is obtained in the normal state or the bonus establishment state It has become.

  In addition, as described above, the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 that are won in the normal state and the bonus establishment state win the bells A and B, which are winning combinations that can win more medals than the prescribed number at the time of winning. The correct hit order that can be made is set to any one of the hit order 3 to 6. On the other hand, the winning JAC 1 in the bonus state is configured to be able to win either the bell A or the bell B when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed in any of the batting orders 1 to 6. . That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the bell A or the bell B in the bonus state is 17800/65536 (about 1 / 3.7) which is the same probability as the winning probability regardless of the batting order. Further, the winning probability of the bell A or the bell B in the normal state and the bonus establishment state is a case where the hit order bell 1 to the hit order bell 8 is won and the order of pressing the stop buttons B1 to B3 is the correct hit order. Therefore, when a game is executed by randomly and randomly selecting the stop operation order from the batting order 1 to the batting order 6, the total winning probability of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is approximately 6933/65536 ( About 1 / 11.0). With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the medal acquisition rate when the game state is the bonus state when the stop operation order is selected evenly and randomly from the batting order 1 to 6 and the game state is the bonus state. Is higher than the expected medal acquisition rate when the gaming state is the normal state and the bonus establishment state.

  Further, as described above, the probability that at least one of bell A or bell B wins in the normal state and the bonus establishment state is configured to be higher than the probability that at least one of bell A or bell B wins in the bonus state. ing. For this reason, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the winning auxiliary effect for notifying the correct batting order when the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won in the bonus establishment state, when the production state is shifted to the AT state. The expected value of the medal acquisition rate in the established state can be made higher than the expected value of the medal acquisition rate in the bonus state.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment designs the medal acquisition performance related to AT games after lowering the expected value of the medal acquisition rate by setting the expected value of the medal acquisition rate in the bonus state to less than 100%. Therefore, the design freedom of the slot machine 1 having the AT function can be greatly improved.

3. Next, an example of each process executed by the control unit 11 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Game control processing>
First, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 32, a process related to the progress of the game executed by the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process executed in the game by each means constituting the control unit 11 in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment. The control unit 11 starts a game control process when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. The operation accepting means 28 according to the present embodiment has a case in which, in the game control process described below, the effect state shifts to the normal CZ state and allows the player to select one of the first CZ state to the third CZ state. If the production state shifts to the normal pseudo bonus state and the player is allowed to select one of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state and the game is started in the third CZ state, the jog dial It is configured to be able to detect an operation on JG. Therefore, each means constituting the control unit 11 detects when the operation accepting means 28 executes a process related to the operation of the jog dial JG by the player in parallel with the game control process and detects the operation of the jog dial JG. An input command based on the operated operation is transmitted to the effect control means 30.

  First, the game control means 27 in the control unit 11 executes an initialization process (S1). In this process, the game control means 27 is triggered by the power-on of the slot machine 1 to determine whether the backup data is normal or the setting change is appropriately reflected, and the flag storage area. 42, a process of initializing (clearing) the counter storage means 43, the reel effect storage area 45, the game state storage area 46, and the main effect state storage area 47 is executed. In the initialization process, when it is determined that the setting change has been executed, the game control unit 27 determines whether the setting change has been executed in a state where the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44. When the setting change has been executed in a state where the display combination is set, the re-lottery process is executed. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment generates backup data at any time while the power is on and stores it in backup storage means (not shown) of the storage unit 40, and an unexpected power interruption occurs. Even in such a case, it is possible to return to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption by executing the initialization process.

  Next, the insertion accepting means 21 in the control unit 11 executes a betting process (S2). In this process, the insertion accepting means 21 determines that the player presses the single bet button BT when the player inserts a prescribed number of medals into the medal slot MI and when the medal is credited more than the prescribed number. Start lever SL is triggered by pressing the same number of times as the specified number of inputs or pressing the max bet button MB and when a normal replay, weak rare replay, or strong rare replay was established in the previous game. Execute the process to validate the operation.

  Next, the internal lottery means 23 in the control unit 11 executes an internal lottery process (S3). In this process, the internal lottery means 23 acquires a random value from the random number generator 22 when the start lever SL is started and a start signal is detected from the start switch 73, and is stored in the internal lottery table storage means. The internal lottery process for determining the winning combination using any of the internal lottery table A to the internal lottery table C is executed. Here, when it is determined to replay as the winning combination, the internal lottery means 23 executes the above-described batting order setting process, the batting order of the clear replay, the batting order of the high-accuracy transition replay, the batting order of the high-accuracy end replay, and the transition Whether the replay batting order and the special additional replay batting order are any of batting order 2 to batting order 6 is determined by lottery.

  Further, in this process, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not to execute the reel effect. When executing a pseudo game as a reel effect, the reel effect determination means 29 causes each means constituting the control unit 11 to execute the processes related to the first to third pseudo games. In addition, the reel effect determination means 29 effects the start command including information on the execution of the pseudo game before the execution of the process of starting the rotation of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 when the pseudo game is executed. Transmit to means 30.

  Next, the reel control means 24 in the control unit 11 executes a reel rotation process (S4). In this process, the reel control means 24 starts to rotate the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Also, the reel control means 24 determines that the reel effect is to be executed and the reel effect is set in the reel effect storage area of the storage unit 40 until the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are in a steady rotation. During the period, the set reel production is executed.

  Next, the reel control means 24 of the control unit 11 executes a reel stop process (S5). In this process, the reel control means 24 validates the stop operation performed on the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 when the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are in steady rotation. Further, the reel control means 24 is operated by pressing the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 based on the winning combination (or loss) determined in the internal lottery process or the display combination set in the first display combination storing area 44a. First reel stop control for stopping or temporarily stopping the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 within 190 ms as a predetermined stop time, and at the time of starting the second pseudo game set in the first display combination storing area 44a Based on the display combination, any one of the second reel stop control is performed so that the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 can be rotated for 190 ms or longer after the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed down. .

  Next, the winning determination means 25 in the control unit 11 executes determination processing (S6). In this process, the winning determination means 25 is predetermined based on the symbol combination displayed on the active line L1 when all of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped or temporarily stopped. It is determined whether or not the winning symbol combination is supported. Then, the winning determination means 25 executes a process corresponding to the winning combination.

  Next, the game control means 27 in the control unit 11 executes a main effect state transition process (S7). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not a transition condition from the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 of the storage unit 40 to another main effect state is satisfied, and the transition is made. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the main effect state currently set in the main effect state storage area 47 is cleared, and the main effect state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set in the main effect state storage area 47. Further, in the game in which the display combination based on the first pseudo game or the display combination based on the second pseudo game is set in the display combination storage area 44, in the game won for replay in the internal lottery, the stop buttons B1 to B1 are displayed in the clear replay order. When the stop button B3 is pressed, the game control means 27 causes the reel effect determination means 29 to execute a re-lottery process.

  Next, the payout control means 26 in the control unit 11 executes a payout process (S8). In this process, the payout control means 26 credits the medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination when the winning determination means 25 determines that the small combination has been won. Further, when the credit exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 50), the payout control means 26 pays out medals for the amount exceeding the upper limit value of the credit from the hopper unit 79 to the medal payout exit MO. put out.

  Next, the game control means 27 executes a bonus process (S9). In this process, the game control means 27 is triggered by the execution of the payout process, and whether the bonus condition end condition (100 medal payout in the bonus state) is established when the game state is the bonus state. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the bonus state has ended, the game control means 27 shifts the gaming state to the normal state. If the game state is the normal state or the bonus establishment state, the game control means 27 proceeds to the next process without executing the bonus process.

  Next, the game control means 27 executes an initialization process at the end of the game (S10), and returns the process to step S2. In this process, the game control unit 27 executes various initialization processes such as initializing the priority order of the reel stop area (described later).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, one main game is executed by executing the processes of Steps S2 to S10.

<Initialization process>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the initialization process executed in step S1 of the control process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control means 27 determines whether or not a setting change has been executed (S11). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not a setting change is performed by operating a setting change switch (not shown) provided in the slot machine 1.

  If it is determined in step S11 that the setting has been changed (YES), the game control means 27 determines whether or not the combo flag is ON (S12). In this process, the game control means 27 refers to the flag storage area 42 of the storage unit 40, wins the pseudo game by reel effect lottery, and executes the first pseudo game of the number of consecutive executions determined by the combo lottery. It is determined whether or not the combo flag set in the flag storage area 42 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S12 that the combo flag is ON (YES), the game control means 27 turns the setting change flag ON (S13) and executes the re-lottery process (S14). In these processes, the game control means 27 turns on the setting change flag stored in the flag storage area 42 of the storage unit 40, and the setting change is executed in the re-lottery process executed in step S14. The display combination re-lottery process is executed. Next, the game control means 27 turns OFF the setting change flag stored in the flag storage area 42 because the re-lottery process is completed in step S14 (S15).

  After performing the process of step S15, when it is determined that the setting change is not performed in the process of step S11 (NO) or when it is determined that the combo flag is OFF in the process of step S12 (NO), The game control means 27 executes various initialization processes (S16) and ends the initialization process. In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether the backup data is normal or whether the setting change is properly reflected, a flag storage area 42, a counter storage means 43, a reel effect storage area 45, a game Processing for initializing (clearing) the state storage area 46 and the main effect state storage area 47 is executed.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery process executed in step S3 of the control process shown in FIG.

  First, the internal lottery means 23 determines whether or not the start switch 73 has detected a start operation (S21). In this process, the internal lottery means 23 executes the lottery process triggered by the start operation being performed on the start lever SL activated by the bet process (see step S2 in FIG. 13). It is determined whether or not a start operation is detected, and this process is repeated until a start operation is detected.

  If it is determined in step S21 that the start switch 73 has detected a start operation (YES), the internal lottery means 23 executes an internal lottery process (S22). In this process, the internal lottery means 23 obtains a random number value from the random number generator means 22, and also selects any one of the internal lottery table A to the internal lottery table C from the table storage means 41 of the storage unit 40 based on the current gaming state. select. Then, the internal lottery means 23 compares the acquired random number value with the selected internal lottery table, and determines whether or not the internal lottery is won according to the comparison result. The internal lottery means 23 sets an internal winning combination flag corresponding to the combination determined to be won and stored in the flag storage area 42 based on the result of the internal lottery.

  Next, the internal lottery means 23 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal state and the winning combination “BB” is won by the internal lottery process (S23). In this process, if the game state is the normal state and the internal lottery means 23 determines that the BB has been won (YES), the game control means 27 assumes that the condition for shifting to the bonus establishment state has been established. The gaming state is shifted from the normal state to the bonus establishment state (S24).

  When the game control means 27 executes the process of step S24 or when the internal lottery means 23 determines that the gaming state is not the normal state in the process of step S23, the winning combination “BB” differs depending on the internal lottery process. If it is determined that at least one of the cases where it is determined that the winning combination is won (NO), the internal lottery means 23 determines whether or not the winning combination “Replay” is won by the internal lottery process. (S25). In this process, when it is determined that the replay is won (YES), the internal lottery means 23 executes a batting order setting process (S26). In this process, when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is pressed down in the batting order 2 to the batting order 6, the internal lottery means 23 can execute the processing corresponding to the batting order by each means constituting the control unit 11. In order to achieve this, the clear replay batting order, the high-accuracy transition replay batting order, the high-accuracy end replay batting order, the transition replay batting order, and the special addition special replay batting order are any of batting order 2 to batting order Or decide by lottery.

  If it is determined that the replay is not won after executing the process of step S26 or in the process of step S25 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 adds the special effect to the reel effect storage area 45 of the storage unit 40. It is determined whether or not a special effect is set (S27). In this process, the reel effect determining means 29 preferentially executes the special effect special effect without executing the reel effect lottery when the special effect special effect is set in the reel effect storage area 45. Therefore, the reel effect storage area 45 is referred to.

  In the process of step S27, when it is determined that the special addition special effect is not set in the reel effect storage area 45 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 executes a reel effect lottery process (S28). In this processing, the reel effect determination means 29 obtains a random number value from the random number generation means 22 and selects one of the reel effect lottery table A to the reel effect lottery table C from the table storage means 41 based on the current main effect state. select. Then, the reel effect determination means 29 compares the acquired random value with the selected reel effect lottery table, and determines whether or not the reel effect lottery is won according to the comparison result. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the reel effect is won (S29). In this process, if it is determined that the reel effect has been won (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the selected reel effect in the reel effect storage area 45 (S30). When the reel effect is set in the reel effect storage area, the reel control means 24 executes the set reel effect in the reel rotation process.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the selected reel effect is a pseudo game (S31). When it is determined that the pseudo game is not won in the process of step S31 (NO) or when it is determined that the reel effect is not won in the process of step S29 (NO), the reel effect determining means 29 It is determined whether the combo flag is ON with reference to the flag storage area 42 (S32). If it is determined in the process of step S32 that the combo flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the flag when the main effect state shifts from the first main effect state to the second main effect state. It is determined whether or not the second pseudo game start flag set in the storage area 42 is ON (S33). If it is determined in step S33 that the second pseudo game start flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 has the main effect state in the second main effect state, and the display combination storing area 44. When the display combination is set in the field, it is determined whether or not the rare combination prefetch flag set in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S34). If it is determined in the process of step S34 that the rare role prefetch flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 indicates that the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the third main effect. It is determined whether it is in a state (S35).

  If it is determined that the pseudo game is won in the process of step S31 (YES), if it is determined that the combo flag is ON in the process of step S32 (YES), the second pseudo game is started in the process of step S33. When it is determined that the flag is ON (YES), in the process of step S34, when it is determined that the rare role prefetch flag is ON (YES) or in the process of step S35, the third main effect state is set. If it is determined that there is (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes a pseudo game process (S36). By the processing from step S31 to step S35, the reel effect determination means 29 actually performs the game won for the pseudo game and the game of the predetermined number of games (8 times) from the game won for the pseudo game. A pseudo game process for executing a process related to a pseudo game can be executed when the pseudo game is executed and when the pseudo game needs to be executed as the game progresses in accordance with the transition of the effect state.

  After performing the process of step S36, when it is determined in the process of step S27 that the special addition effect is set in the reel effect storage area 45 (YES) or in the process of step S35, the main effect state storage area If it is determined that the main effect state set to 47 is not the third main effect state (NO), the internal lottery means 23 generates a start command and transmits the start command to the effect control means 30 ( S37). In this process, the internal lottery means 23 transmits a start command including information on the winning combination won as a result of the internal lottery and information on the start of the game based on the start operation detected by the start switch 73 to the effect control means 30. To do.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not a special effect is set in the reel effect storage area 45 (S38). In this process, if the reel effect determining means 29 determines that the special effect is not set in the reel effect storage area 45 (NO), the reel effect determining means 29 ends the internal lottery process. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the special special effect is added to the reel production storage area 45 (YES), the reel control means 24 executes a special special reel control process (S39), and the internal lottery. The process ends. In the process of step S39, the reel control means 24 rotates and stops the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, and the bet switch 72 detects that the max bet button MB is pressed while each reel is stopped. In this case, the special addition special reel effect that rotates and stops each reel again is executed a plurality of times (three times in this embodiment), and a special special signal is produced every time each reel is rotated and stopped. A special addition specialized reel control process to be transmitted to the control means 30 is executed.

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game process executed in step S36 of the internal lottery process shown in FIG.

  First, the reel effect determination means 29 executes a pseudo game initialization process (S41). In this process, when the display combination based on the first pseudo game is set in the display combination storing area 44 and the main effect state shifts to the third main effect state, the display combination storage area 44 is cleared (initialized). )

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the first main effect state (S42). In this process, when it is determined that the first main effect state is set (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the first pseudo game process (S43) and ends the pseudo game process. In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 executes each process related to the first pseudo game.

  If it is determined in step S42 that the first main effect state is not set (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 indicates that the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the second main effect state. It is determined whether it is in a state (S44). In this process, if it is determined that the second main effect state is set (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the second pseudo game process (S45), and ends the pseudo game process. In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 executes each process related to the second pseudo game.

  If it is determined in step S44 that the second main effect state has not been set (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the third pseudo game process (S45) and ends the pseudo game process. In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 executes each process related to the third pseudo game.

  Thus, the reel effect determination means 29 is configured to change the pseudo game to be executed according to the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47. Thereby, the reel effect determination means 29 can execute the pseudo game corresponding to the effect state by changing the main effect state by the game control means 27 when the effect state shifts.

<First simulated game processing>
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first pseudo game process executed in step S43 of the pseudo game process shown in FIG.

  Here, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment executes the first pseudo game process shown in FIG. 17 and the normal performance state process shown in FIG. A process of shifting to the latent state, a process of continuing the first pseudo game until the number of times of execution of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos, and a process of causing the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game at the end of the latent state. And a process of executing a prefetch effect in the latent state.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts to the latent state by turning on the combo flag when the reel game lottery (see step S28 in FIG. 15) is won for the pseudo game (step S51 to step S51). (See S55), the latent state is continued until the main game is executed eight times including the game won in the pseudo game (see Step S56 to Step S64). In addition, the slot machine 1 executes the above-described roaring effect and prefetching effect in the main game executed in the latent state (see step S283 to step S286 in FIG. 36), and the first pseudo game may be executed. Suggest to the player that the is high.

  When the main game is executed eight times in the latent state, the slot machine 1 ends the latent state, generates the freeze based on the start operation of the start lever SL and the start switch 73 detecting the start operation. This game is delayed and the first pseudo game is executed (see Step S56, Step S65 to Step S74).

  In addition, the slot machine 1 is in a state where the remaining number of executions of the game executed in the latent state is three until the first pseudo game of the number of combos determined by the combo lottery is set in the display combination storing area 44. In the started game, a new display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h, and the display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c and the eighth display combination storage area 44h ( Step S58 to Step S64). As a result, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment shifts to the latent state again after the execution of the first first pseudo game, and when the main game is executed five times for the second and subsequent latent states. It is complete | finished and the 1st pseudo | simulation game after the 2nd time can be performed.

  Then, in the slot machine 1, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game, generates a start command including the contents of the first pseudo game, and transmits the start command to the effect control means 30. The effect control means 30 that has received the command is caused to execute control processing related to the transition of the effect state associated with the execution of the first pseudo game (see steps S284 to S298 in FIG. 36). In addition, the slot machine 1 completes the freeze and resumes the processing relating to the game by executing the processing of step S75 to step S77.

  Hereinafter, details of each control process executed by the reel effect determination means 29 when the first pseudo game process is executed will be described. First, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the combo flag is ON (S51). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 refers to the flag storage area 42 and determines whether or not the combo flag is set, so that the reel effect lottery in this game (see step S28 in FIG. 15). It is determined whether the first pseudo game process is executed based on winning of the pseudo game or whether the first pseudo game process is executed based on winning of the pseudo game in the previous game.

  If it is determined in step S51 that the combo flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 executes a combo lottery process and sets the lottery result in the combo counter (S52). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 determines the number of combos to continuously execute the first pseudo game by combo lottery, and sets the value determined by the combo lottery to the combo counter of the counter storage means 43 of the storage unit 40. To do. In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 determines the number of combos to be one of values in the range of 1 to 5 by combo lottery.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 executes a first pseudo game display combination lottery process (S53). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 acquires a random value from the random number generation means 22, compares the acquired random value with the display combination lottery table A stored in the table storage means 41, and according to the comparison result. The display combination is determined. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the winning display combination in the eighth display combination storage area 44h which is the end of the display combination storage area 44 (S54).

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 turns on the combo flag (S55), and ends the first pseudo game process. In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 uses the combo flag stored in the flag storage area 42 in order to execute the first pseudo game process regardless of the result of the reel effect lottery at the next game execution. Turn on and shift to the latent state. When the combo flag is turned ON, the reel effect determination means 29 can execute the control process related to the latent state in steps S56 to S64 in the next and subsequent main games until the first pseudo game is executed. it can.

  If it is determined in the process of step S51 that the combo flag is ON (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not a display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a ( S56). In this process, if it is determined that the display combination is not set in the first display combination storage area 44a (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 to 1 Shift to the top (S57). In the process of step S57, the reel effect determination means 29 receives the second game corresponding to the start of the game in the latent state based on the start operation of the start lever SL and the start switch 73 detecting the start operation. The display combination stored in the display combination storage area 44b to the eighth display combination storage area 44h is moved one by one in the head direction. By executing the processing of step S57 each time the game is started in the latent state until the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a, the reel effect determination means 29 displays the display every time the game is executed. One display combination storage area in which a combination is set can be moved in the head direction, and when eight games are executed, a display combination can be set in the first display combination storage area 44a.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not a display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c (S58). In this process, when the reel effect determination means 29 determines that a plurality of times of the first pseudo game are to be continuously executed by combo lottery, when the main game is executed five times from the execution of the first pseudo game. In order to execute the first and subsequent first pseudo games, it is determined whether or not a display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c, and a display combination is not set in the third display combination storage area 44c. If determined (NO), the first pseudo game process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S58 that the display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 subtracts 1 from the stored value of the combo counter (S59). . Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the stored value of the combo counter is 0 (S60). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the stored value of the combo counter is 0, so that the last execution of the execution of the first pseudo game with the number of combos determined in the combo lottery. It is determined whether or not the display combination related to the first pseudo game is set in the third display combination storage area 44c.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S60 that the stored value of the combo counter is 0 (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 has a chance that the display combination set in the third display combination storage area 44c is a chance combination. It is determined whether or not there is (S61). In this process, if it is determined that the display combination is not a chance combination (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 ends the first pseudo game process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display combination is a chance combination (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes a combo lottery process and sets the lottery result in the combo counter (S62). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the combo lottery again based on the fact that it is determined once in the combo lottery executed in step S52 and is determined as the chance combination as the display combination in the process of step S53. The value determined by the combo lottery is set in the combo counter. As a result, the reel effect determination means 29 can always continue the first pseudo game a plurality of times when the chance combination is won in the first pseudo game display lottery in the game won for the pseudo game.

  After determining whether the stored value of the combo counter is not 0 after executing the process of step S62 or in the process of step S60 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 selects the first pseudo game display combination lottery during combo. Processing is executed (S63). In this process, the reel effect determining means 29 refers to the display combination lottery table B when the display combination set in the third display combination storage area 44c is a weak rare combination, and displays the first pseudo game display combination. When the lottery is executed and the display combination set in the third display combination storing area 44c is a strong rare combination, the first pseudo game display combination lottery is executed with reference to the display combination lottery table C. Further, when the display combination set in the third display combination storage area 44c is a chance combination, it is determined by lottery whether to refer to the display combination lottery table B or the display combination lottery table C. The first pseudo game display combination lottery is executed with reference to the display combination lottery table. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the winning display combination in the eighth display combination storage area 44h (S64), and ends the first pseudo game process.

  If it is determined in step S56 that the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the display combination in the first display combination storage area 44a. In a state where the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation, the latent state is terminated, the game is delayed by causing a freeze in the current game, and the first simulation Processing related to the execution of the game is executed. The reel effect determination means 29 first adds 1 to the combo continuation counter in the counter storage means 43 (S65). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 counts the number of times the first pseudo game executed this time is the first pseudo game to be executed in a series of first pseudo games that can be executed continuously. Add 1 to the continuation counter.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the stored value of the combo counter is 0 (S66). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the combo counter is 0 (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 is stored in the flag storage area 42 and the first pseudo game of the number of combos determined in the combo lottery is determined. In the execution of the above, the combo end flag indicating that the first pseudo game as the last execution will be executed is turned ON (S67).

  After performing the process of step S67 or in the process of step S66, if it is determined that the stored value of the combo counter is not 0 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 generates a start command and the effect control means 30 (S68). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 includes a start including information on the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a and information on the start of the first pseudo game based on the start operation detected by the start switch 73. The command is transmitted to the effect control means 30.

  Next, the reel control means 24 executes a reel rotation process (S69). In this process, the reel control means 24 executes a process of rotating the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, similarly to the reel rotation process executed in step S4 of the game control process (see FIG. 13). 1 Pseudo game is started. Next, the reel control means 24 executes a reel stop process (S70). In this process, the reel control means 24 executes a process of temporarily stopping the rotating first reel R1 to the third reel R3 in the same manner as the reel stop process executed in step S5 of the game control process. End the pseudo game. As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the common reel rotation process and the reel stop process when the reel is rotated and stopped when the main game is executed and when the first pseudo game is executed. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the slot machine 1 can suppress an increase in the capacity of the program, and can reduce the design cost and the processing load.

  Next, the winning determination means 25 executes determination processing (S71). In this process, the winning determination means 25 executes a process based on the symbol combination displayed on the active line L1 temporarily, similarly to the determination process executed in step S6 of the game control process.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the stored value of the combo counter is 0 (S72). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the combo counter is 0 (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 has completed the execution of the first pseudo game for the number of times determined by the combo lottery, so The continuation counter is cleared (S73), and the combo flag is turned off (S74). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S72 that the stored value of the combo counter is not 0 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 advances the process to step S75 without executing the process of step S74. That is, the reel effect determination means 29 continues the state in which the combo flag is turned on until the first pseudo game of the number of combos determined by the combo lottery (see S62) is executed by the reel control means 24. After one pseudo game is over, it is possible to shift to the latent state again.

  After determining whether the stored value of the combo counter is not 0 after executing the process of step S74 or in the process of step S72 (NO), the reel effect determining means 29 has detected that the start switch 73 has started the start operation. It is determined whether or not (S75). In this process, when it is determined that the start switch 73 has not detected the start operation (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the timeout time has elapsed (S76). In this process, if it is determined that the timeout time has not elapsed (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 returns the process to step S75. If it is determined in step S75 that the start switch 73 has detected a start operation (YES), or if it is determined in step S76 that the time-out period has elapsed (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 Freezing is terminated, the process proceeds to step S77, and the process relating to the game is resumed. In these processes, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to rotate the temporarily stopped first reel R1 to third reel R3 again based on the execution of the start operation by the player on the start lever SL. And the player can feel as if the game has started. Further, the reel effect determination means 29 advances the first pseudo game process based on the elapse of the time-out time, so that the start lever SL is not started after the temporary stop of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, that is, Even if the progress of the game is stopped in the middle of the main game, one main game can be ended by proceeding with the first pseudo game process and ending the first pseudo game process. The timeout time is a predetermined time, and is set to 30 seconds, for example.

  In the process of step S77, the reel effect determination means 29 shifts the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 by one head (S77), and ends the first pseudo game process. In the process of step S77, the reel effect determining means 29 sets the display combination stored in the second display combination storage area 44b to the eighth display combination storage area 44h to 1 in the head direction, substantially in the same manner as the process of step S57. Move one. In addition, the reel effect determination means 29 performs the first display combination because the process related to the first pseudo game based on the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is executed by the processes in steps S65 to S74. The display combination set in the storage area 44a is cleared.

<Second simulated game processing>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the second simulated game process executed in step S45 of the simulated game process shown in FIG.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the production state shifts to the AT state and the correct batting order is pressed twice during the winning of the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8, the main production state Is switched from the first main production state to the second main production state. Thereby, the reel effect determination means 29 can determine whether or not the effect state is the AT state based on the main effect state at the start of the game.

  Then, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment executes the second pseudo game start time process in the first game in which the main effect state is switched from the first main effect state to the second main effect state. In the second pseudo game start process, the slot machine 1 continuously executes the pseudo game in which the symbol combination “BAR-BAR-BAR” constituting the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game is temporarily stopped and displayed three times or more. The reel control means 24 is executed (see step S81 to step S83, step S94 to step S105). Further, the slot machine 1 determines the number of medals that the player can acquire in the AT state based on the number of times that the symbol combination constituting the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game is temporarily stopped (step S431 in FIG. 42). To step S433).

  When the process at the start of the second pseudo game is completed, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment turns on the rare role prefetch flag when the pseudo game is won by reel effect lottery (see step S28 in FIG. 15). It shifts to the latent state and continues the latent state until the main game is executed eight times including the game won in the pseudo game (see step S84 to step S93). In addition, the slot machine 1 executes the above-described roaring effect and prefetching effect in the main game executed in the latent state (see step S444 to step S445 in FIG. 43), and the first pseudo game may be executed. Suggest to the player that the is high.

  Then, the slot machine 1 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the second pseudo game, generates a start command including the contents of the second pseudo game, transmits the start command to the effect control means 30, and receives the start command. The means 30 is made to perform the control process which concerns on the transition of the production | presentation state accompanying execution of a 2nd pseudo game (refer step S446-step S469 of FIG. 43).

  Hereinafter, details of each control process executed by the reel effect determination means 29 when the second pseudo game process is executed will be described. First, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the second pseudo game normal time flag is ON (S81). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 refers to the flag storage area 42 and determines whether or not the second pseudo game normal time flag is set, so that the normal second pseudo game process and the main effect are performed. It is determined which of the second pseudo game start time process to be executed in the next game in which the state has shifted from the first main effect state to the second main effect state.

  In the process of step S81, when it is determined that the second pseudo game normal time flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines that the second pseudo game start time process has not ended, In order to execute the process related to the second pseudo game start process, the second pseudo game start display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (S82). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 displays the symbol combination “BAR-BAR-BAR” composed of the BAR symbols “BAR” on the invalid line consisting of the middle of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 as a display combination. A display combination at the start of the second pseudo game that enables temporary stop display is set in the first display combination storage area 44a. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 adds 1 to the second pseudo game start time counter in the counter storage means 43 (S83). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 adds 1 to the second pseudo game start time counter that counts the number of times the second pseudo game start time process is executed.

  In the process of step S81, when it is determined that the second pseudo game normal time flag is ON (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 has already finished the second pseudo game start time process, In order to execute the process related to the second simulated game, first, it is determined whether or not a display combination is set at the head of the first display combination storage area 44a (S84). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a, and the subsequent processing is a process for causing the reel control means 24 to execute the second pseudo game. Whether to execute the process related to the latent state is determined. In the process of step S84, when it is determined that the display combination is set at the head of the first display combination storage area 44a (YES), the reel effect determination unit 29 causes the reel control unit 24 to execute the second pseudo game. In order to perform the processing to be executed, a freeze is generated (S85), and this game is delayed.

  In the process of step S84, when it is determined that the display combination is not set at the head of the first display combination storage area 44a (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 performs the process related to the latent state. First, it is determined whether or not the rare role prefetch flag is ON (S86). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 refers to the flag storage area 42 and determines whether or not the rare role prefetch flag is set, so that the display combination is set in any of the display combination storage areas 44. It is determined whether or not it has already shifted to the latent state. If it is determined in the process of step S86 that the rare role prefetch flag is ON (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 is already set in the latent state, and is set in the display combination storage area 44. The displayed display combination is shifted one head (S87). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 responds to the start of the game in the latent state based on the start operation of the start lever SL and the start switch 73 detecting the start operation. The display combination stored in the storage area 44b to the eighth display combination storage area 44h is moved one by one in the head direction. By this processing, the reel effect determination means 29 moves one display combination storage area in which the display combination is set every time a game is executed in the head direction, and when eight games are executed, A display combination can be set in the first display combination storage area 44a.

  After determining that the rare role prefetch flag is OFF after executing the process of step S87 or in the process of step S86 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the pseudo game in the reel effect storage area 45. It is determined whether or not it is performed (S88). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the pseudo game is won in the reel effect lottery (see step S28 in FIG. 15) in the current game.

  In the process of step S88, when it is determined that the pseudo game is set in the reel effect storage area 45 (YES), the reel effect determining means 29 executes the second pseudo game display combination lottery process (S89). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the second pseudo game display combination lottery with reference to the display combination lottery table E when the high-accuracy state flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON. When the high-accuracy state flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is OFF, the second pseudo game display combination lottery is executed with reference to the display combination lottery table D. Here, the high-accuracy state flag is when the main production state is the second main production state, the replay is won by the internal lottery, and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed down in the order of the high-accuracy transition replay. This flag is set, and is controlled to be ON or OFF in a main effect state transition process (see FIGS. 30 and 31) described later. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the winning display combination in the eighth display combination storage area 44h which is the end of the display combination storage area 44 (S90).

  If it is determined that the pseudo game is not set in the reel effect storage area 45 after executing the process of step S90 or in the process of step S88 (NO), the reel effect determining means 29 causes a freeze. It is determined whether or not (S91). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the process of step S85 is executed and a freeze has occurred, thereby causing the reel control means 24 to execute the second pseudo game in the current game. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S91 that no freeze has occurred (NO), the reel effect determination unit 29 determines whether or not the rare role prefetch flag is ON (S92). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the rare role prefetch flag in order to determine whether or not to execute the process related to the transition to the latent state in this game because no freeze has occurred. It is determined whether or not it has been done. If it is determined in the process of step S92 that the rare role prefetch flag is ON (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 has already completed the control process in the latent state in the processes of steps S86 to S90. Therefore, the second pseudo game process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rare role prefetch flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the rare role prefetch flag to ON (S93) and ends the second pseudo game process. In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 is stored in the flag storage area 42 in order to shift to the latent state in which the second pseudo game process is executed regardless of the result of the reel effect lottery at the next and subsequent games. Turn on the rare role look-ahead flag.

  After performing the process of step S83 or in the process of step S91, if it is determined that a freeze has occurred (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 generates a start command and transmits it to the effect control means 30. (S94). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 performs the normal second simulated game process or the second simulated game based on the information of the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a and the start operation detected by the start switch 73. A start command including information regarding which of the game start processing is started is transmitted to the effect control means 30.

  Next, the reel control means 24 executes a reel rotation process (S95). In this process, the reel control means 24 performs the first reel R1 in the same manner as the reel rotation process executed in step S4 of the game control process (see FIG. 13) and step S69 of the first pseudo game process (see FIG. 17). -The process of rotating the third reel R3 is executed, and the second pseudo game is started. Next, the reel control means 24 executes a reel stop process (S96). In this process, the reel control means 24 temporarily moves the rotating first reel R1 to third reel R3 in the same manner as the reel stop process executed in step S5 of the game control process and step S70 of the first pseudo game process. A process of stopping is executed, and the second pseudo game is ended. As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a common reel when the reel is rotated and stopped when the main game is executed, when the first pseudo game is executed, and when the second pseudo game is executed. A rotation process and a reel stop process are executed. Thereby, the slot machine 1 can suppress an increase in the capacity of the program, and can reduce the design cost and the processing load.

  Next, the winning determination means 25 executes determination processing (S97). In this process, the winning determination means 25 is based on the symbol combination temporarily displayed on the active line L1, as in the determination process executed in step S6 of the game control process and step S71 of the first pseudo game process. Execute the process.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the second pseudo game normal time flag is ON (S98). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 refers to the flag storage area 42 and determines whether or not the second pseudo game normal time flag is set, so that the second pseudo game process executed this time is the normal The second pseudo game process and the second pseudo game start time process are determined.

  If it is determined in step S98 that the second pseudo game normal time flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether the stored value of the second pseudo game start time counter is 3 or more. It is determined whether or not (S99). In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 is configured to determine whether to continue after executing the second pseudo game start time process three times in succession by lottery. By determining whether or not the stored value of the start time counter is 3 or more, it is determined whether or not the second pseudo game start time process has been executed three times in succession.

  In the process of step S99, when it is determined that the stored value of the second pseudo game start counter is 3 or more (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the second pseudo game start continuous lottery process. (S100). In this process, since the reel effect determination means 29 has executed the second pseudo game start time process three times or more, whether or not to continue the second pseudo game start time process is determined by the second pseudo game start time continuous lottery. decide.

  Next, the reel effect determining means 29 determines whether or not the second pseudo game start continuous lottery has been won (S101). In this process, if it is determined that the second pseudo game start continuous lottery has not been won (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 turns on the second pseudo game normal time flag (S102). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 continuously executed the second pseudo game start process three times or more and was not selected in the second pseudo game start process continuous lottery. The game start time process is ended, and the second pseudo game normal time flag in the flag storage area 42 is turned ON in order to execute the normal second pseudo game process in the second and subsequent second pseudo game processes. When the second pseudo game normal time flag is turned ON in the process of step S102, the reel effect determination means 29 can move the process from step S81 to step S86 when the second pseudo game process is executed next time. It becomes.

  After executing the process of step S102, if it is determined in the process of step S98 that the second pseudo game normal time flag is ON (YES), the stored value of the second pseudo game start time counter in the process of step S99 Is determined to be less than 3 (NO), or in the process of step S101, if it is determined that the second pseudo game start continuous lottery has been won (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 uses the start switch 73. It is determined whether or not a start operation is detected (S103). In this process, when it is determined that the start switch 73 has not detected the start operation (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not a timeout time has elapsed (S104). In this process, when it is determined that the timeout time has not elapsed (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 returns the process to step S103. If it is determined in step S103 that the start switch 73 has detected a start operation (YES) or if it is determined in step S104 that the time-out period has elapsed (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 performs step S105. Proceed with the process. In these processes, the reel effect determination means 29 advances the second pseudo game process based on the execution of the start operation on the start lever SL by the player or the elapse of the time-out time, whereby the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Even if the start lever SL is not started after the temporary stop, that is, even if the progress of the game is stopped during the main game, the second simulated game is executed by proceeding with the second simulated game. It is possible to prevent the process from stopping during the process. The timeout time is a predetermined time, and is set to 30 seconds, for example.

  In the process of step S105, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the second pseudo game normal time flag is ON (S105). In this process, if it is determined that the second pseudo game normal time flag is ON (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 ends the second pseudo game process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second pseudo game normal time flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 indicates that the executed second pseudo game process is the second pseudo game start process, and the second In order to continuously execute the second pseudo game start time process because the number of executions of the pseudo game start process is less than 3 or more than 3 times and the second pseudo game start continuous lottery is won. The process returns to step S82. By the processing from step S103 to step S105, the reel effect determination means 29 again turns the temporarily stopped first reel R1 to third reel R3 on the reel control means 24 based on the execution of the start operation on the start lever SL by the player. And the player can feel as if the game has started.

<Third pseudo game processing>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the third pseudo game process executed in step S46 of the pseudo game process shown in FIG.

  Here, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the production control means 30 changes the production state to the special CZ state, and when the replay batting order is continuously pressed twice during the replay win, The effect state is configured to switch from the first main effect state to the third main effect state. Thereby, the reel effect determination means 29 can determine whether or not the effect state is the special CZ state based on the main effect state at the start of the game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the first game in which the main effect state is switched from the first main effect state to the third main effect state, the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation. Based on this, the third simulated game process shown in FIG. 19 is executed. Here, in the reel control at the time of execution of the third pseudo game process, the slot machine 1 executes a third pseudo game reel control process shown in FIG. 28 described later, and starts rotating the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. After that, either the red 7 symbol “red 7” or the BAR symbol “BAR” which is a symbol constituting the symbol combination of the third pseudo game display combination in the middle of the first reel R1 and the middle of the third reel R3. By temporarily displaying one of the reels, when the second reel R2 temporarily stops, either “red 7-red 7-red 7” or “BAR-BAR-BAR” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle stage of each reel. Execute reel control that may occur. In addition, the slot machine 1 continues the third pseudo game until the symbol combination constituting the third pseudo game display combination is displayed four times continuously or until the third pseudo game is executed five times continuously. (See step S113 to step S124).

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the third pseudo game is finished, the effect control means 30 is based on the result of the third pseudo game, and whether or not the AT state is changed, and when the game is changed to the AT state. The presence / absence of a privilege to be given to the person is determined (steps S376 to S389). At this time, the slot machine 1 adds a privilege advantageous for the player to acquire a medal every time the number of times the symbol combination constituting the third pseudo game display combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third pseudo game is increased. It is configured.

  Hereinafter, details of each control process executed by the reel effect determination means 29 when the third pseudo game process is executed will be described. First, the reel effect determination means 29 sets 5 to the third pseudo game counter of the counter storage means 43 (S111). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 sets 5 to the third pseudo game counter that stores the remaining number of executions of the third pseudo game process. Thereby, the reel effect determination means 29 of this embodiment can perform a 3rd pseudo | simulation game process 5 times continuously. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 turns on the third pseudo game flag (S112). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 causes the respective means constituting the control unit 11 to determine that the third pseudo game process is being executed. The third pseudo game flag stored in the flag storage area 42 Set.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 executes a third pseudo game display combination lottery process (S113). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 executes the third pseudo game display combination lottery with reference to the display combination lottery table F stored in the table storage unit 41. Next, the reel effect determination means 29 sets the winning display combination in the first display combination storage area 44a (S114). In this process, when the reel effect determining means 29 wins the third pseudo game display combination (7 matches) or the third pseudo game display combination (BAR alignment) as the display combination in the third pseudo game display combination lottery, If the winning display combination is set in the first display combination storing area 44a and the third pseudo game display combination lottery is not won, either the lost display combination (7 strokes) or the lost display combination (BAR rolls) The display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is the third pseudo game display combination (S115). In this process, when it is determined that the third pseudo game display combination is set (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 adds 1 to the third pseudo game establishment counter in the counter storage means 43 (S116). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 adds 1 to the third pseudo game establishment counter that counts that the third pseudo game display combination is won because the third pseudo game display combination is won.

  After determining that the third pseudo game display combination is not set after executing the process of step S116 or in the process of step S115 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 sets the third pseudo game counter to 1 Subtract (S117). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 decrements the third pseudo game counter by 1 as the third pseudo game process is executed once.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 generates a start command and transmits it to the effect control means 30 (S118). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 includes information on the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a and information on the execution of the third pseudo game process based on the start operation detected by the start switch 73. A start command is transmitted to the effect control means 30.

  Next, the reel control means 24 executes a third pseudo game reel control process (S119). In this process, the reel control means 24 starts to rotate the first reel R1 to the third reel R3, and the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 based on the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. Is temporarily stopped, and when the stop button B2 is pressed, the second reel R2 is temporarily stopped based on the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. Here, when the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 are temporarily stopped temporarily, the symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 are set in the first display combination storing area 44a. If the displayed display combination is the third pseudo game display combination (7 sets) or the lose display combination (7 strokes), the red 7 symbol “red 7” is temporarily stopped and set in the first display combination storage area 44a. If the display combination being displayed is the third pseudo game display combination (with BAR alignment) or the lost display combination (with BAR), the BAR symbol “BAR” is temporarily displayed.

  Next, the winning determination means 25 executes determination processing (S120). In this process, the winning determination means 25 is temporarily placed on the active line L1 as in the determination process executed in step S6 of the game control process, step S71 of the first pseudo game process, and step S97 of the second pseudo game process. A process based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is executed.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the start switch 73 has detected a start operation (S121). In this process, when it is determined that the start switch 73 has not detected the start operation (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the timeout time has elapsed (S122). In this process, if it is determined that the timeout time has not elapsed (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 returns the process to step S121. If it is determined in step S121 that the start switch 73 has detected a start operation (YES), or if it is determined in step S122 that the time-out period has elapsed (YES), the reel effect determination unit 29 performs step S123. Proceed with the process. In these processes, the reel effect determination means 29 advances the third pseudo game process based on the execution of the start operation by the player on the start lever SL or the elapse of the time-out time, whereby the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. Even if the start lever SL is not started after the temporary stop, that is, even if the progress of the game is stopped during the game, the third pseudo game is executed by proceeding with the third pseudo game process. It is possible to prevent the process from stopping during the process. The timeout time is a predetermined time, and is set to 30 seconds, for example.

  In the process of step S123, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the stored value of the third pseudo game counter is 0 (S123). In this process, if it is determined that the port number of the third pseudo game counter is not 0 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether the stored value of the third pseudo game establishment counter is 4 or not. Determination is made (S124). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the third pseudo game establishment counter is not 4 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines that the end condition of the third pseudo game process is not established. The process returns to step S113. As described above, the reel effect determination means 29 is executed by continuously executing the fifth pseudo game process five times or the winning of the third pseudo game display combination for four consecutive times as a condition for ending the third pseudo game process. Up to step S113 to step S124, the process is looped, and the third pseudo game process can be continuously executed.

  When it is determined in the process of step S123 that the stored value of the third simulated game counter is 0 (YES) or when the stored value of the third simulated game establishment counter is determined to be 4 in the process of step S124 (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the third pseudo game initialization process (S125), and ends the third pseudo game process. In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 performs a process of initializing the third pseudo game flag stored in the flag storage area 42, and the third pseudo game counter and the third pseudo game establishment counter in the counter storage means 43. Run.

<Reel stop processing>
FIG. 20 is executed in step S5 of the game control process shown in FIG. 13, step S70 of the first pseudo game process shown in FIG. 17, and step S96 of the second pseudo game process shown in FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing reel stop processing.

  First, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not an effective stop button B1 to stop button B3 corresponding to the rotating reel has been pressed (S131). In this process, the reel control means 24 receives the stop signal received when any one of the stop buttons B1 to B3 is pressed down and a stop signal is transmitted from the stop switch 74 that detects the stop operation or the temporary stop operation. Based on the signal, it is determined which of the stop buttons B1 to B3 is pressed. In this process, if it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 has not been pressed or the stop button corresponding to the reel that has already been subjected to the reel stop process has been pressed (NO), the reel control means 24 The process of step S131 is repeated. In the present embodiment, the reel control means 24 detects that the plurality of stop buttons among the stop buttons B1 to B3 are simultaneously pressed and receives a plurality of stop signals at the same time. The received stop signal is discarded and the process of step S131 is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S131 that any one of the stop buttons B1 to B3 has been pressed (YES), the reel control unit 24 generates a reel stop command and causes the effect control unit 30 to stop the reel. A command is transmitted (S132). In this process, the reel control unit 24 transmits a reel stop command including information on the pressed stop button to the effect control unit 30.

  Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not a display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (S133). In this process, if it is determined that the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (YES), the reel control means 24 indicates that the set display combination is the display combination at the start of the second simulated game. It is determined whether or not (S134). When it is determined in the process of step S133 that no display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (NO), or in the process of step S134, the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is displayed. If it is determined that it is not the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game (NO), the reel control means 24 turns on the sliding frame number limit flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S135). With these processes, the reel control means 24 has no display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a, that is, when the main game is executed, and when the second pseudo game is started in the first display combination storage area 44a. When a display combination other than the display combination is set, as the reel stop control, the number of sliding frames within 190 ms as a predetermined stop time after pressing the stop buttons B1 to B3, that is, within 4 frames The first reel stop control is executed to stop the rotating reel corresponding to the stop button pressed down in step (1).

  If it is determined in the process of step S134 that the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is the display combination at the start of the second simulated game (YES), the reel control means 24 The process proceeds to step S136 without executing the process in S135. Thus, when the reel effect determination means 29 executes the second pseudo game start time process, the reel control means 24 does not depend on the pressing timing of the stop buttons B1 to B3, but the first reels R1 to R1. The BAR symbol “BAR” provided one by one on the peripheral surface of the three reels R3 can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle stage of each reel at a predetermined stop time after the stop buttons B1 to B3 are pressed. In order to execute the second reel stop control that enables each reel to rotate for a certain 190 ms or longer, the reel stop process is performed without turning on the sliding frame number limit flag.

  When it is determined that the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is the display combination at the start of the second simulated game after executing the process of step S135 or in the process of step S134 (YES), The reel control means 24 sets stop data corresponding to the winning combination or display combination (S136). Here, the stop data is data stored in stop data storage means (not shown) of the storage unit 40, and is set for each winning combination. Further, the stop data is configured such that different stop data can be set according to the gaming state when the winning combination is overlapped with a plurality of winning combinations. For example, the winning combination “Replay” that is won in duplicate for normal replay, weak rare replay, and strong rare replay, when the game state is the normal state, stop data as shown in FIG. When the game state is the bonus establishment state, stop data as shown in FIG. 21B is set for each replay. Here, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the bonus establishment state, stop data corresponding to the bell symbol A “BLA”, which is a symbol that constitutes a weak rare replay and is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the second reel R2, and “0” is set for both stop data corresponding to the bell symbol B “BLB”, which is a symbol constituting the strong rare replay and stopped and displayed in the lower stage of the second reel R2.

  Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the sliding frame number limit flag is ON (S137). In this process, when it is determined that the sliding frame number limit flag is ON (YES), the reel control unit 24 executes a reel stop area initial setting process based on the score calculation (S138). After executing the process of step S138 or when it is determined in the process of step S137 that the sliding frame number limit flag is OFF (NO), the reel control means 24 executes a reel stop area update process (S139). Then, a reel stop position determination process is executed (S140).

  Regarding the details of the processing of step S138 to step S140, in the case where the gaming state is a bonus establishment state, the main game won for replay in the internal lottery, that is, the sliding frame number limit flag is ON and the first reel stop control is executed. When the stop button B1 is pressed at the timing when the bell symbol A “BLA” arranged at the position of the reel stop number 9 in the middle stage of the first reel R1 is rotated and displayed, the processing from step S138 to step S140 is performed. An example of execution will be described.

  In the process of step S138, the reel control means 24 first, as shown in FIG. Based on the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -RPB (BLA, BLB) -RPA (RPB)” that constitutes the replay won in the internal lottery in the game, a score is set for each symbol arranged on the peripheral surface of each reel Execute the setting process. Here, in assigning each score, in order to preferentially establish the replay over the BB, two points are assigned to the symbols constituting the replay and one point is assigned to the symbols constituting the BB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 23, the reel control unit 24 performs initial setting of the reel stop area of the storage unit 40. In the initial setting of the reel stop area, the reel control means 24 first acquires stop data of the winning combination, that is, BB stop data and replay stop data. Next, the reel control means 24 sets 0 in the priority order 1 to priority order 5 areas, and the priority order 6 to priority order 10 areas are rotated and displayed within 190 ms after the stop button is pressed. The score calculation process for setting the stop data of the winning combination is executed using the points set in the setting process for the number of possible symbols, and 0 is set in the areas of the priority rankings 11 to 15. In the case of the score calculation process of this specific example, the reel stop number 9 to the reel stop number 13 that is the range in which the first reel R1 can be stopped and displayed is a replay that is a symbol constituting a replay in which a score of “2” is set. Since the pattern A “RPA” is arranged at the position of the reel stop number 11 (position where two frames slip from the pressed position), the first reel R1 in the replay stop data shown in FIG. Is set in the priority order 8 area.

  In the process of step S139, the reel control means 24 first executes a table determination process for acquiring stop table data from the table storage means 41 based on the winning combination in the internal lottery. FIG. 24A shows stop table data of the first reel R1 when replay and BB are won. As shown in FIG. 24A, the stop table data is a data table in which stop data is set for each reel stop number, that is, for each symbol. For example, stop data and reel stop set for the reel stop number 20 When the symbols arranged on the reel are the same symbol as in the stop data “00010101B” set to number 16, the same stop data is set. Next, the reel control unit 24 uses the acquired stop table data for the number of symbols that can be rotated and displayed within 190 ms after the stop button is pressed, that is, the slip that can be stopped and displayed after the stop button is pressed. Referring to the stop data set to the reel stop number within the range of the number of frames, stop table reference processing for setting the priority 11 to priority 15 of the reel stop area is executed. In this specific example, the stop data set in the reel stop number 9 to the reel stop number 13 is referred to from the stop table data shown in FIG. 24A, and the “stop” item in FIG. As shown, priority levels 11 to 15 are set. Next, the reel control means 24 calculates using the values set in the priority orders 6 to 10 and the values set in the priority orders 11 to 15, and the priority order 1 to the priority order. A reel stop area update process for setting a value of 5 is executed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24B, stop data “00000011B” is set only for priority order 8 out of priority order 6 to priority order 10, so priority order 3 is given priority order. The stop data “00000011B” of 8 and the stop data “00100011B” of priority order 13 are integrated and “00000011B” is set. In addition, since the data set in the priority order 6, the priority order 7, the priority order 9, and the priority order 10 are all “0”, the priority order 1, the priority order 2, the priority order 4, and the priority order 5, respectively. Set “0”.

  In the process of step S140, the reel control unit 24 first uses the reel stop area updated as a result of the score calculation process and the stop table reference process, and the stop data set in the priority order 1 to the priority order 15, and Then, the replay stop data “00000011B” is integrated and searched in order from priority 1, and the search is executed until the integration result is not zero. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, when the priority order 3 is searched, the integration result is not zero. Using this result, the reel control means 24 indicates that the position of the first reel R1 has slipped two frames from the reel stop number 13 when the stop button B1 is pressed, that is, the position of the reel stop number 11 is the first reel. A reel stop position determination process for determining the stop position of R1 is executed. Thereby, the reel control means 24 stops the first reel R1 after rotating the first reel R1 to the position of the reel stop number 11.

  The above is the details of the processing from step S138 to step S140 when the first reel stop control is executed. Next, when the gaming state is a bonus establishment state and the second pseudo game start time process is executed, that is, when the sliding reel number limit flag is OFF and the second reel stop control is executed, the first reel R1 Taking the case where the processing of step S139 and step S140 is executed when the stop button B1 is pressed at the timing when the cherry symbol B “CHB” arranged at the position of the reel stop number 1 in the middle is rotated and displayed, is taken as an example. explain.

  When the sliding frame number limit flag is OFF and the reel control means 24 is allowed to rotate for 190 ms or more from when the stop button is pressed until the reel is stopped, the reel control means 24 proceeds from step S137 to step S139 and proceeds to step S138. By skipping the processing, the above-described setting processing and score calculation processing are not executed. Therefore, when the second reel stop control is executed, the priority order 1 to priority order 10 in the reel stop area is the initialization process at the end of the game executed in step S10 of the game control process (see FIG. 13). In addition, no change is made from 0, which is a value set in various initialization processes executed in step S16 of the initialization process (see FIG. 14).

  In the process of step S139, the reel control means 24 first determines the table for obtaining the temporary stop table data from the table storage means 41 based on the second pseudo game start display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. Execute the process. FIG. 26 shows temporary stop table data of the first reel R1 when the second pseudo game display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a. As shown in FIG. 26, the temporary stop table data is a data table in which stop data is set for each reel stop number, that is, for each symbol, in substantially the same manner as the stop table data shown in FIG. Next, the reel control unit 24 sets stop data set in the temporary stop table data determined by the table determination process in order from the priority 11 of the reel stop area. In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the cherry symbol B “CHB” arranged at the position of the reel stop number 1 is rotated and displayed on the middle stage of the first reel R1, the stop button B1 is pressed. Therefore, the stop data “10011100B” of the reel stop number 1 is set to the priority order 11, and the stop data “100001111B” of the reel stop number 0 is set to the priority order 12. In addition, since the symbol at the position of reel stop number 20 is rotated and displayed at the priority order 13 after the symbol at the position of reel stop number 0, stop data “00010101B” for reel stop number 20 is set and given priority. Similarly, the stop data after the reel stop number 19 is set after the rank 14.

  In the process of step S140, the reel control means 24 first uses the reel stop area updated in the reel stop area update process, and the stop data set in the priority order 11 to the priority order 31 and the second pseudo game. The start display combination stop data “01000000B” is integrated and searched in order from priority 11, and the search is executed until the integration result is not zero. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, when the priority order 31 is searched, the integration result is not zero. Using this result, the reel control means 24 determines that the position of the first reel R1 has slipped 20 frames from the reel stop number 1 when the stop button B1 is pressed, that is, the position of the reel stop number 2 is the first reel. A reel temporary stop position determination process for determining the temporary stop position of R1 is executed. Thereby, the reel control means 24 stops the first reel R1 after rotating the first reel R1 to the position of the reel stop number 2.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the first reel stop control for executing the first reel stop control for stopping the reel within 190 ms after the stop switch detects the stop operation or the temporary stop operation as the reel stop control. 1 pseudo game process and normal second pseudo game process, and a second pseudo game start process for executing a second reel stop control capable of rotating the reel more than 190 ms after the stop switch detects the temporary stop operation. By changing the progress of the control process in the reel stop control process, a reel control that stops the reel within 190 ms after the stop button substantially the same as this game is pressed, and a stop button peculiar to the pseudo game The reel control in the pseudo game can be changed depending on the case of performing the reel control capable of rotating the reel for 190 ms or more after being pressed. There, it is possible to realize a variety of effect using a reel without increasing the data capacity.

  Here, as described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, “00000011B” is set as the second reel stop data for the normal replay, and “00000010B” is set as the second reel stop data for the weak rare replay. The second reel stop data of strong rare replay is set to “00000001B”. That is, at the timing of pressing the stop button B2, the reel control means 24 causes the bell symbol A “BLA” that is a symbol constituting the weak rare replay to the second reel R2 and the bell symbol B that is a symbol constituting the strong rare replay. “BLB” can be stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the gaming state is a bonus establishment state, the second reel stop data of the normal replay is set to “00000011B”, and the second reel of the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay is set. Both stop data are set to 0. That is, when the gaming state is a bonus establishment state, the reel control means 24, when executing the point calculation process in the process of step S138, within the range of 5 frames or less from the timing of pressing the stop button B2, Even if “BLA” or bell symbol B “BLB” exists, 0 is set to the priority order corresponding to bell symbol A “BLA” or bell symbol B “BLB” among the priority orders 6 to 10. At the same time, in order to set the stop data “00000011B” in the priority order corresponding to the replay symbol B “RPB”, the stop position is determined at the position where the replay symbol B is displayed in the lower stage of the second reel R2 in the reel position determination process. The

  That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)” constituting the weak rare replay and the symbol constituting the strong rare replay. The combination “RPA (RPB) -BLB-RPA (RPB)” is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed, and when the gaming state is a bonus establishment state, a symbol combination and a strong rare replay are configured that constitute a weak rare replay in this game. The symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)” and the strong rare that constitute the weak rare role that is the same symbol combination as the weak rare replay only when executing the pseudo game cannot be stopped. The symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLB-RPA (RPB)” that constitutes a strong rare role that is the same symbol combination as the replay can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of displaying the symbol combination of the weak rare replay and the symbol combination of the strong rare replay, which is an opportunity to give a privilege advantageous to the player by being displayed, and can have a variety of games. At the same time, the opportunity to enable stop display and the opportunity to enable temporary stop display by changing the opportunity to enable stop display and the opportunity to enable temporary stop display according to the gaming state, and a wide range of opportunities to enable temporary stop display. It is possible to prevent the design of the system from becoming complicated.

  After executing the processing of step S140, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the sliding frame number limit flag is ON (S141). In this process, when it is determined that the sliding frame number limit flag is ON (YES), the reel control unit 24 determines whether or not the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button has stopped (S142). ) If it is determined that it has not been stopped (NO), the process of step S142 is repeated until it is determined that it has stopped. If it is determined in step S141 that the sliding frame number limit flag is OFF (NO), or if it is determined in step S142 that the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button has stopped (YES) ), The reel control means 24 determines whether or not all of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped (S143). In this process, when it is determined that all of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped (YES), the reel control means 24 ends the reel stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 is rotating (NO), the reel control means 24 determines whether or not all of the stop buttons B1 to B3 have been pressed. Is determined (S144). In this process, if it is determined that any one of the stop buttons B1 to B3 is not pressed (NO), the reel control unit 24 returns the process to step S131. On the other hand, when it is determined that all of the stop buttons B1 to B3 have been pressed (YES), the reel control unit 24 returns the process to step S143.

  As described above, when the reel control unit 24 executes the second reel stop control, before the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button temporarily stops, the stop buttons other than the pressed stop button When the temporary stop signal detected by the stop switch 74 when the pressing operation is performed and the stop switch 74 detects a temporary stop operation for the other reel different from the one reel until the one reel is temporarily stopped. In addition, the other reel can be temporarily stopped before one reel.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can detect a temporary stop operation on one reel, detect a temporary stop operation on the other reel before one reel temporarily stops, and can detect the other reel. Can be temporarily stopped before one of the reels, so that the time required for one second pseudo game start process can be reduced, and the game can be progressed quickly. Can do.

  Note that the reel control unit 24 may be configured to execute the process of step S143 while omitting the process of step S141 and the process of step S142. In this case, even when the first reel stop control is executed, the reel control unit 24 is pressed before one reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped or temporarily stopped. When a stop button other than the stop button is pressed, a stop signal or temporary stop signal detected by the stop switch 74 is validated, and the stop switch 74 is defined as one reel until one reel is stopped or temporarily stopped. When a stop operation or temporary stop operation for another different reel is detected, the other reel can be stopped or temporarily stopped before one reel.

  When configured in this way, the slot machine 1 detects a stop operation for one reel, the stop switch 74 can detect the stop operation for the other reel before one reel stops, and the other reel Can be stopped before one of the reels, the time required for one game can be shortened, and a quick progress of the game can be realized.

<Third pseudo game reel control process>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the third pseudo game reel control process executed in step S119 of the third pseudo game process shown in FIG.

  First, the reel control means 24 starts to rotate the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 (S151). Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is the third pseudo game display combination (seven assortment) or the lost display combination (seven turn). (S152). In this processing, when the reel control means 24 automatically temporarily stops the first reel R1 and the third reel R3, the symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the first reel R1 and the middle stage of the third reel R3 is red 7 symbols. Whether “red 7” or BAR symbol “BAR” is selected is determined.

  In the process of step S152, if it is determined that the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is the third pseudo game display combination (seven assortment) or the lost display combination (7 strokes) (YES) The reel control means 24 temporarily stops and displays the red 7 symbol “red 7” on the middle stage of the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 (S153). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S152 that the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is not the third pseudo game display combination (seven assortment) or the lost display combination (seven strokes) ( NO) The reel control means 24 temporarily stops and displays the BAR symbol “BAR” on the middle stage of the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 (S154). The reel control means 24 is processed by the player by the processing of step S153 and step S154. However, the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 are automatically temporarily stopped without pressing the stop button B1 and the stop button B3.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the game so that only the third pseudo game display combination or the lose display combination is always drawn when executing the third pseudo game state. Can be shown to the player, and the player can always have a sense of expectation for the temporary stop display of the third pseudo game display combination that triggers the provision of the effect mode in the special CZ state. In addition, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the third simulated game state to make the first reel R1 and the third reel R3 feel the establishment of the third simulated game display combination, and only the stop button B2 is played. A game method of a form different from a conventional game in which three or more stop buttons are pressed and operated, in which a person presses the second reel R2 to aim at a temporary stop display of a symbol that establishes a third pseudo game display combination. Can be executed by the player according to the third simulated gaming state.

  Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the stop button B2 has been pressed (S155). In this process, when it is determined that the stop button B2 is not pressed (NO), the reel control unit 24 repeats the process of step S155. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop button B2 has been pressed (YES), the reel control unit 24 generates a reel stop command and transmits the reel stop command to the effect control unit 30 (S156). In this process, the reel control unit 24 transmits a reel stop command including information on the pressed stop button to the effect control unit 30.

  Next, the reel control means 24 sets stop data corresponding to the third pseudo game display combination or the lose display combination (S157). In this process, the reel control means 24 executes substantially the same process as step S136 of the reel stop process (see FIG. 20).

  Next, the reel control means 24 executes a reel stop area update process (S158), and executes a reel stop position determination process (S159). In these processes, the reel control unit 24 rotates 190 ms after the stop button B2 is pressed in substantially the same manner as when the second reel stop control is executed in the processes of steps S139 and S140 of the reel stop process. A reel temporary stop control process is executed when it is possible. That is, in the process of step S158, the reel control unit 24 acquires temporary stop table data from the table storage unit 41 based on the third pseudo game display combination or the lose display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a. The temporary stop table determination process is executed, and the stop data set in the temporary stop table data determined in the temporary stop table determination process is set in order from the priority 11 of the reel stop area. In the process of step S159, the reel control means 24 stores the stop data set in the priority order 11 to the priority order 31 and the first display combination using the reel stop area updated in the process of step S158. The stop data corresponding to the display combination set in the area 44a is integrated and searched in order from the priority order 11, and the search is executed until the integration result is not 0, and the temporary stop of the second reel R2 is performed based on the execution result. A reel temporary stop position determination process for determining the position is executed. Then, the reel control means 24 temporarily stops the second reel R2 after the second reel R2 rotates to the temporary stop position. That is, the reel control means 24 reliably displays the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a regardless of the pressing timing of the stop button B2 when executing the third pseudo game process. It is configured.

  Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the second reel R2 is temporarily stopped (S160). In this process, when it is determined that the second reel R2 is not temporarily stopped (NO), the reel control unit 24 repeats the process of step S160. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second reel R2 is temporarily stopped (YES), the reel control unit 24 determines whether or not the stored value of the third pseudo game establishment counter of the counter storage unit 43 is 4. (S161). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the third pseudo game establishment counter is 4 (YES), the reel control means 24 causes the reel effect determination means 29 to add a special effect to the reel effect storage area. Store (S162), and the third pseudo game reel control process ends. With this process, the reel effect determining means 29 is configured to execute the reel when executing the main game executed after the end of the third pseudo game state when the third pseudo game display combination is displayed four times in the third pseudo game state. A special addition special effect can be executed as an effect, and a special additional special effect can be executed continuously from the reel effect in the third pseudo gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S161 that the stored value of the third pseudo game establishment counter is not 4 (NO), the reel control means 24 indicates that the stored value of the third pseudo game counter in the counter storage means 43 is 0. It is determined whether or not (S163). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the third pseudo game counter is not 0 (NO), the reel control means 24 determines that the third pseudo game state is still continuing, and The game reel control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the third pseudo game counter is 0 (YES), the reel control means 24 determines that the third pseudo game state has been executed five times in succession, and the game control means 27 The main effect state is shifted to the first main effect state (S164), and the third pseudo game reel control process is terminated.

<Special added reel control processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special addition specialized reel control process executed in step S39 of the internal lottery process shown in FIG.

  First, the reel control means 24 sets 3 to the special addition special counter of the counter storage means 43 (S171). In this process, the reel control means 24 sets 3 to the special addition special counter with the special addition special effect as the minimum number of continuations.

  Next, the reel control means 24 executes special addition special reel effect processing (S172). In this process, the reel control means 24 performs a special addition special reel effect that stops and displays the watermelon symbol “WM” on the middle stage of each reel after rotating the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 a certain number of times. To do. Next, the reel control unit 24 transmits a special addition special signal including information on the execution of the special addition special reel effect to the effect control unit 30 (S173). Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the stored value of the special addition special counter is 0 (S174). In this process, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not a special addition special effect has been executed three or more times.

  If it is determined in step S174 that the stored value of the special addition special counter is not 0 (NO), the reel control unit 24 subtracts 1 from the stored value of the special addition special counter (S175). On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the special addition special counter is 0 (YES), the reel control unit 24 executes special special reel production continuous lottery (S176). In this process, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not to execute the special addition special effect after executing the special addition special effect for the number of times to be executed by the special addition special reel production continuous lottery. . Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the special addition special reel effect continuous lottery is won (S177).

  If it is determined after the processing of step S175 or in the processing of step S177 that the special addition special reel effect continuous lottery has been won (YES), the reel control means 24 indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed or the maximum It is determined whether or not the bet button MB has been pressed (S178). In this process, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not a bet signal output from the bet switch 72 has been received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or when the max bet button MB is pressed. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed and the maximum bet button MB has not been pressed (NO), the process of step S178 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed or the maximum bet button MB is pressed (YES), the reel control unit 24 returns the process to step S172. In this way, the reel control means 24 is configured to execute the second and subsequent special special reel effects when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the max bet button MB is pressed.

  In the process of step S177, if it is determined that the special extra special reel effect continuous lottery is not won (NO), the reel control means 24 includes the special extra special including information that the special special effect has been completed. An end signal is transmitted to the effect control means 30 (S179). The reel effect determination means 29 clears the reel effect storage area 45 when the special addition special effect ends (S180). In addition, the game control means 27 shifts the main effect state to the second main effect state for the next and subsequent games (S181), and ends the special added special reel control process. As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the main effect state shifts to the second main effect state when the special effect is added as the reel effect.

<Main effect state transition processing>
30 and 31 are flowcharts showing the main effect state transition process executed in step S7 of the game control process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control means 27 executes a main effect state initialization process (S191). In this process, the game control means 27 is in the case where the main effect state is shifted in step S164 of the third pseudo game reel control process (see FIG. 28) and in step S181 of the special added special reel control process (see FIG. 29). Then, a process for initializing each counter used in the main effect state transition process is executed.

  Next, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the batting order bell group 1 and the batting order bell group 2 are won by internal lottery (S192). In this process, if it is determined that the batting order bell group 1 or the batting order bell group 2 is won (YES), the game control means 27 has the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B. It is determined whether or not a pressing operation has been performed (S193). In this process, the game control means 27 uses the bell A or the bell B in which the order of stop operations detected by the stop switch 74, that is, the order in which the player presses the stop buttons B1 to B3 is the predetermined stop order. It is determined whether or not the stop order determination unit 24a determines that the correct answer order is to be awarded.

  In the process of step S193, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the order of winning the bell A or the bell B (YES), the game control means 27 is stored in the main effect state storage area 47. It is determined whether the set main effect state is the first main effect state (S194). In this process, when it is determined that the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is not the first main effect state (NO), the game control means 27 determines that the bell storage in the counter storage means 43 is not continuous. The correct answer counter is cleared (S195), and the main effect state transition process is terminated. In this process, the game control means 27 is the second when the stop order determining means 24a continuously determines that it is not the predetermined stop order in the hit order determination performed when the hit order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2 are won. In order to shift from the main effect state to the first main effect state, the bell continuous incorrect answer counter is cleared when the stop order determining unit 24a determines that it is the predetermined stop order.

  In the process of step S194, when it is determined that the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the first main effect state (YES), the game control means 27 displays the bell of the counter storage means 43. The continuous correct answer counter is incremented by 1 (S196). In this process, the game control means 27 determines that the stop order determination means 24a of the batting order bell group 1 and the batting order bell group 2 when the main effect state is the first main effect state. In the batting order determination executed at the time of winning, the number of consecutive correct answers to the bell continuous correct counter in order to shift from the first main effect state to the second main effect state when it is continuously determined that it is the predetermined stop order Save.

  Next, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stored value of the bell continuous correct answer counter is 2 (S197). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the bell continuous correct answer counter is not 2 (NO), the game control means 27 ends the main effect state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the bell continuous correct answer counter is 2 (YES), the game control means 27 determines that the stop order determining means 24a is predetermined when the hit order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2 are won. By continuously determining that the stop order has been pressed, it is determined that the transition condition from the first main effect state to the second main effect state has been established, and the first effect set in the main effect state storage area 47 is set. By clearing the main effect state and setting the second main effect state, the state shifts to the second main effect state (S198). Next, the game control means 27 sets a second pseudo game start flag, which is a flag for causing the reel effect determination means 29 to execute the second pseudo game start process in the next game in the flag storage area 42 ( S199).

  In the process of step S193, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the order in which the bell A or the bell B is won (NO), the game control means 27 stores the main effect state storage area. It is determined whether the main effect state set to 47 is the first main effect state (S200). If it is determined that the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the first main effect state after executing the process of step S199 or in the process of step S200 (YES), the game control means 27 clears the bell continuous correct answer counter (S201), and ends the main effect state transition process. In this process, the game control means 27, when the stop order determination means 24a in the first main effect state determines that the predetermined stop order is not pressed down when the hit order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2 are won, By clearing the bell continuous correct answer counter, when the stop order determining means 24a continuously determines that the predetermined stop order is pressed during the winning order of the hit order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2, the first main effect It is possible to shift from the state to the second main effect state. In this process, the game control means 27 is initialized by clearing the bell continuous correct answer counter based on the fact that the main effect state has shifted to the second main effect state.

  If it is determined in step S200 that the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is not the first main effect state (NO), the game control means 27 sets the bell continuous incorrect answer counter. 1 is added (S202). Next, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stored value of the bell continuous incorrect answer counter is 2 (S203). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the bell continuous incorrect answer counter is not 2 (NO), the game control means 27 ends the main effect state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the bell continuous incorrect answer counter is 2 (YES), the game control means 27 is predetermined when the stop order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2 are selected by the stop order determining means 24a. It is determined that the transition order from the second main effect state to the first main effect state is satisfied, and is set in the main effect state storage area 47 because it is determined that the stop order has not been pressed. By clearing the second main effect state and setting the first main effect state, the state shifts to the first main effect state (S204). Next, the game control means 27 turns off the second pseudo game normal time flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S205). Next, the game control means 27 determines whether or not a display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 (S206). In this process, when it is determined that the display combination is set (YES), the game control means 27 clears the display combination storage area 44 (S207).

  By the processing of step S204 to step S207, the game control means 27 determines that the predetermined stop order has not been depressed when the stop order determining means 24a is selected for the hit order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2, and the second main When the transition is made from the effect state to the first main effect state, the execution of the determined second pseudo game process can be stopped by clearing the display combination storing area 44. With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the stop order determination unit 24a to win the bell A and the bell B according to the stop operation order detected by the stop switch 74 until the second simulated game is executed. As a method that is not intended by the designer of the slot machine 1 by canceling the execution of the determined second pseudo game when it is determined that it is a batting order that cannot be performed, for example, the production state is the AT state, and the medal In accordance with the winning auxiliary effect, even though the winning auxiliary effect for informing the pressing order of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is executed. If the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the absence of the batting order, the execution of the second pseudo game is stopped, and the execution of the second pseudo game is highly accurate. Can prevent the execution of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery, so that the execution of the second pseudo game can be executed effectively according to the gameability, and the gameability can be prevented from being impaired. It is possible to prevent the interest from being damaged.

  If it is determined that the display combination is not set in the display combination storage area 44 after executing the process of step S207 or in the process of step S206 (NO), the game control means 27 is in the second state of the main effect state. Since the transition from the main effect state to the first main effect state is made, the bell continuous incorrect answer counter is cleared (S208), and the main effect state transition process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S192 that the hit order bell group 1 and the hit order bell group 2 have not been won (NO), the game control means 27 determines whether or not the replay has been won (S209). In this process, when it is determined that the replay is not won (NO), the game control means 27 ends the main effect state transition process.

  If it is determined in step S209 that the replay is won (YES), the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the clear replay batting order (S210). ). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the clear replay batting order set in the batting order setting process (see step S26 in FIG. 15), and clear replay is performed. When it is determined that the pressing operation has been performed in the order of hitting (YES), the game control means 27 determines whether or not a display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 (S211). In this process, if it is determined that a display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 (YES), the game control means 27 executes a re-lottery process (S212).

  In the process of step S209, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the clear replay stroke order (NO), the game control means 27 determines that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 is highly accurate. It is determined whether or not a pressing operation has been performed in the order of transition replay (S213). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the hitting order of the high-accuracy transition replay set in the hitting order setting process, and presses in the hitting order of the high-accuracy transition replay. If it is determined that it has been operated (YES), the game control means 27 determines whether or not the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the second main effect state (S214). In this process, when it is determined that the second main effect state is set (YES), the game control means 27 turns on the high-accuracy state flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S215). .

  In this way, the game control means 27 sets the high-accuracy state flag when the main production state is the second main production state and the batting order of the high-accuracy transition replay is pressed at the time of winning the replay. The display combination lottery table that the effect determining means 29 refers to in the display combination lottery (see step S89 in FIG. 18) in the second simulated gaming state can be changed from the display combination lottery table D to the display combination lottery table E.

  In the process of step S213, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the hit order of the high-accuracy transition replay (NO), the game control means 27 determines that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 It is determined whether or not the pressing operation is performed in the order of hitting the high-precision end replay (S216). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the striking order of the high-accuracy end replay set in the batting order setting process, and presses in the striking order of the high-precision end replay. When it determines with having operated (YES), the game control means 27 determines whether the main effect state set to the main effect state storage area 47 is a 2nd main effect state (S217). In this process, if it is determined that the second main effect state is set (YES), the game control means 27 turns off the high-accuracy state flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S218). .

  In this way, the game control means 27 turns off the high-accuracy state flag when the main production state is the second main production state and the batting order of the high-precision end replay is pressed at the time of winning the replay, The display combination lottery table referred to by the reel effect determination means 29 in the display combination lottery in the second simulated gaming state can be changed from the display combination lottery table E to the display combination lottery table D.

  In the process of step S216, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the hit order of the high-accuracy end replay (NO), the game control means 27 determines that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 It is determined whether or not a pressing operation has been performed in the order of hitting special special replay (S219). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the batting order of the special extra special replay set in the batting order setting process, and the batting order of the special extra special replay. If it is determined that the button has been pressed (YES), the game control means 27 causes the reel effect determining means 29 to set a special effect on the reel effect storage area 45 (S220).

  In the process of step S219, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the order of the special additional special replay (NO), the game control means 27 determines the stop button B1 to the stop button B3. It is determined whether or not the button has been pressed in the order of transition replay (S221). In this process, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the order of transition replay set in the hit order setting process, and determines that the button is pressed in the order of transition replay. If it is (YES), the game control means 27 adds 1 to the replay continuous correct answer counter in the counter storage means 43 (S222). In this process, when the game control means 27 continuously determines that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the order of transition replay in the batting order determination executed at the time of winning the replay, the first main effect state The number of consecutive correct answers is stored in the replay continuous correct answer counter in order to shift to the third main performance state.

  Next, the game control means 27 determines whether or not the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is the first main effect state (S223). In this process, when it is determined that the main effect state is the first main effect state (YES), the game control means 27 determines whether or not the stored value of the replay continuous correct counter is 2 (S224). ). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the replay continuous correct answer counter is not 2 (NO), the game control means 27 ends the main effect state transition process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the replay continuous correct answer counter is 2 (YES), the game control means 27 has continuously determined that the hitting order of the transition replay was pressed at the time of winning the replay. , It is determined that the transition condition from the first main effect state to the third main effect state is established, the first main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 is cleared, and the third main effect state is set. By doing so, the state shifts to the third main effect state (S225).

  After executing the processing of step S212, step S215, step S218, step S220, and step S225, if it is determined in the processing of step S211 that the display combination is not set in the display combination storage area 44 (NO), step S214 If it is determined that the second main effect state is not set (NO) in the process of (No), the process of step S221 is determined if it is determined that the second main effect state is not set (NO) in the process of step S217. In the case where it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the order of the transition replay (NO) and in the process of step S223, it is determined that the first main effect state is not set. (NO), the game control means 27 is continuously replayed. Clear the solution counter (S226), to terminate the main performance state transition process. In this process, the game control means 27 is based on the fact that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the batting order other than the batting order of the transition replay when the replay is won or the third main effect state is entered. To clear.

<Re-drawing process>
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the re-lottery process executed in step S14 of the initialization process shown in FIG. 14 and step S212 of the main effect state transition process shown in FIGS.

  First, the reel effect determination means 29 turns off the combo flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S231). Next, the reel effect determination means 29 clears the combo counter in the counter storage means 43 (S232). Next, the reel effect determination means 29 clears the combo continuation counter in the counter storage means 43 (S233). In these processes. The reel effect determination means 29 executes each process in order to initialize, that is, cancel the execution of the determined first pseudo game process.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not the setting change flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S234). In this process, if it is determined that the setting change flag is OFF (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area is the second main effect state. It is determined whether or not (S235). By these processes, the reel effect determination means 29 is operated by pressing the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the clear replay batting order when the setting change of the slot machine 1 is executed and the replay is won in the first main effect state. In the second main effect state, it is determined which cancellation condition is satisfied, that is, stop button B1 to stop button B3 are pressed in the order of clear replay when the replay is won.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the main effect state is the second main effect state (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 has executed the re-lottery process stored in the flag storage area 42. A rare combination re-lottery flag indicating that is turned on (S236). Next, the reel effect determination means 29 executes a display combination re-lottery process (S237). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 turns off the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set to cancel the display combination, and from the display combination storage area changed to the OFF state to the first display combination storage area 44a. For each of these, a display combination re-lottery process is executed to refer to the reel effect lottery table B to determine whether or not to set a display combination.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not a display combination is set in any of the display combination storage areas 44 (S238). In this process, if it is determined that the display combination is not set in the display combination storage area 44 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 ends the re-lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 turns on the rare combination prefetch flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S239). ), The re-lottery process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the main effect state is not the second main effect state (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 stores it in the flag storage area 42 indicating that the re-lottery process has been executed. The set combo re-lottery flag is turned ON (S240). After performing the process of step S240 or in the process of step S234, when it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the display combination re-lottery process (S241). In this process, the reel effect determination means 29 turns off the display combination storage area in which the display combination is set to cancel the display combination, and from the display combination storage area changed to the OFF state to the first display combination storage area 44a. A display combination re-lottery process is executed in which each of the display combinations is determined by referring to the reel production lottery table A to determine whether or not the display combination is set.

  Next, the reel effect determination means 29 determines whether or not a display combination is set in any of the display combination storage areas 44 (S242). In this process, if it is determined that the display combination is not set in the display combination storage area 44 (NO), the reel effect determination means 29 ends the re-lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 (YES), the reel effect determination means 29 executes the combo lottery process and sets the lottery result in the combo counter (S243). Then, the combo flag is turned ON (S244), and the re-lottery process is terminated.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the replay until the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 after the execution of the pseudo game is determined until eight games are executed. When the clear replay batting order is pressed at the time of winning and the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied by executing the setting change of the slot machine 1, the determined pseudo game is canceled and simulated Whether or not the game is to be executed by the reel control means 24 is determined by executing a display combination re-lottery process. For this reason, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is determined when any of the predetermined cancellation conditions is satisfied after the pseudo control is executed by the reel control means 24 until the pseudo game is executed. The pseudo game that has been determined before the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied by canceling the pseudo game that has been performed and by determining whether or not to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the display combination re-lottery process. Is canceled once when a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, and it is determined again whether or not the reel control means 24 is to be executed by a re-lottery process, thereby preventing the occurrence of a control process that impairs game play and It can prevent the interest to be lost.

<Direction control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG. 56, processing related to effects in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. 33 to 56 mainly show only the process related to the transition of the effect state among the processes related to the effect. Details of each process to be output to the effect device 80 such as the display device 81 and the sound device 83 are as follows. The illustration is omitted. Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 executes the main game and the pseudo game when performing an effect related to the number of games (for example, displaying the number of games on the display device 81). It is comprised so that the sum total of may be displayed. In addition, when the first to third pseudo games are executed, the effect control means 30 is such that the current game is different from the main game, such as “pseudo game” on the display device 81. The notification effect which shows is performed.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the effect control processing executed by the effect control means 30 in each game in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The effect control means 30 starts the effect control process when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on.

  First, the effect control means 30 executes an initialization process (S251). In this process, the effect control means 30 initializes a signal to be output to the display device 81 and the acoustic device 83 when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not a command has been received from each means constituting the control unit 11 (S252). In this process, the effect control means 30 continues to execute the process of step S252 until it is determined that the command has been received. And when it determines with having received the command from each means which comprises the control part 11 (YES), the production | presentation control means 30 performs a command reception process (S253), and returns a process to step S252.

<Command reception processing>
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the command reception process executed in step S253 of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the received command is a start command (S261). In this process, when it is determined that the start command is received (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the start command reception process (S262), and ends the command reception process. Here, the start command reception process is a process of determining an effect and an effect state to be executed by the effect device 80 such as the display device 81 and the sound device 83 with the start of the main game or the pseudo game. In the start command reception process, the effect control unit 30 executes different processes for each effect state, and executes effects based on each effect state by each device constituting the effect device 80. When the received start command is a start command transmitted in the game, that is, a start command transmitted from the internal lottery means 23, the effect control unit 30 performs various processes with reference to the winning combination information. When the start command received and executed is a start command transmitted in the pseudo game, that is, a start command transmitted from the reel effect determination means 29, it is set in the first display combination storing area 44a instead of the winning combination information. Various processes are executed with reference to the information of the displayed combination.

  If it is determined in step S261 that the received command is not a start command (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether the received command is a winning command (S263). In this process, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (YES), the effect control means 30 executes a winning command reception process (S264) and ends the command receiving process. Here, the process at the time of receiving a winning command is a process of determining an effect and an effect state to be executed by an effect device such as the display device 81 and the sound device 83 according to the winning combination as a result of this game.

  In the process of step S263, when it is determined that the received command is not a winning command (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the received command is an input command (S265). In this process, when it is determined that the received command is an input command (YES), the effect control means 30 executes an input command reception process (S266) and ends the command reception process. Here, the process at the time of receiving the input command is based on the information (dial rotation signal, determination signal, effect signal) included in the input command transmitted from the operation receiving means 28, and selection and determination of the normal CZ state or the normal pseudo bonus state. Whether or not to continue the accumulation of the effect signal every time the effect signal is output, while accumulating the effect signal output from the determination switch 76 in the third CZ state The pressing continuation lottery process for determining

  If it is determined in the process of step S265 that the received command is not an input command (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a process based on the received command (S267) and ends the command reception process. . Here, examples of commands other than the start command and the winning command include the above-described reel stop command (see step S132 in FIG. 20 and step S159 in FIG. 28) and the like. The effect control means 30 determines an effect and an effect state to be executed by an effect device such as the display device 81 and the sound device 83 based on the received command.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start command reception process executed in the command reception process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 is configured to execute the following processing when the gaming state is a bonus establishment state, and when the gaming state is a normal state or a bonus state. , Different processes are executed and the production state is not changed. The effect control means 30 may be configured to be able to execute various processes related to the transition of the effect state regardless of the gaming state.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the effect state set in the effect state storage area 48 is the AT state (S271). In this process, when it is determined that the effect state is the AT state (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the AT state process (S272) and ends the start command receiving process. In the AT state process, the effect control means 30 continues the AT state until the stored value of the AT number counter of the counter storage means 43 subtracted when the bell A and the bell B are won, and the hit order bell 1 to the hit order bell. At the time of winning eight, a winning assistance effect for informing the correct hit order for winning bell A and bell B is executed. Further, the effect control means 30 displays the total number of times the main game and the pseudo game are executed when displaying the number of games on the display device 81 in various effects in the AT state. As a result, the production control means 30 matches that the number of games experienced by the player and the sum of the number of executions of the main game and the number of times of execution of the pseudo game match, and the player feels uncomfortable about the number of games in the AT state. Can be prevented.

  If it is determined in step S271 that the effect state is not the AT state (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the effect state set in the effect state storage area 48 is the CZ state. (S273). In this process, when it is determined that the effect state is the CZ state (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the CZ state process (S274) and ends the start command receiving process. In the CZ state process, when the normal CZ state is executed, the effect control unit 30 causes the player to select which of the first CZ state to the third CZ state is executed, and sets the first CZ state to the third CZ state. The AT transfer lottery performed is executed. In addition, when the special CZ state is executed as the CZ state, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not to shift to the AT state and give the effect mode based on the execution result of the third pseudo game process (see FIG. 19). .

  In the process of step S273, when it is determined that the effect state is not the CZ state (NO), the effect control means 30 executes the normal effect state process (S275) and ends the start command receiving process. In the normal effect state process, the effect control means 30 displays a pseudo game display symbol in the pre-read display area 82 of the display device 81 when the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44, the CZ state and the AT A lottery process related to the transition of the effect state for determining whether or not to shift to the state and a process related to the penalty digestion when a penalty disadvantageous to the player occurs are executed.

<Normal performance state processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the normal performance state process executed in step S275 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the penalty flag is ON (S281). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not a penalty disadvantageous to the player has occurred by determining whether or not the penalty flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is set. .

  In the process of step S282, when it is determined that the penalty flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the penalty process (S282) and ends the normal effect state process. In this process, when the penalty has occurred, the effect control means 30 ends the normal effect state process after the process of step S282 is finished so as not to execute each process related to the transition of the effect state.

  In the process of step S281, when it is determined that the penalty flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the combo flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON ( S283). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the reel effect determination means 29 is hidden by determining whether or not the combo flag that is set when the display combination is stored in the display combination storage area 44 is ON. When it is determined whether or not the state has shifted to the state and it is determined that the combo flag is OFF (NO), the first pseudo game process shown in FIG. It is determined that it is not the start command transmitted in step S68, and the normal effect state process is terminated without executing the pre-reading effect executed during the latent state and the process related to the effect state transition accompanying the execution of the first pseudo game. . In addition, when the roaring effect has already been executed, the effect control unit 30 ends the roaring effect in accordance with the determination that it is not in the latent state by the process of step S283.

  If it is determined in step S283 that the combo flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes during the latent state since the reel effect determination means 29 has shifted to the latent state. The received start command is step S68 of the first simulated game process (see FIG. 17) in order to determine whether to execute the process related to the pre-reading effect and the roaring effect or to execute the process related to the execution of the first simulated game. It is determined whether or not the start command is transmitted in the process (S284). In this process, if it is determined that the received start command is not the start command transmitted by the execution of the first pseudo game process (NO), it is determined that the effect control means 30 is currently in the latent state. Then, in order to execute processing related to the pre-reading effect and the turning effect, it is determined whether or not the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area 44e (S285). In this process, when it is determined that no display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area 44e (NO), the effect control means 30 has shifted to the latent state. However, the state in which the pre-reading effect is started, that is, it is determined that the remaining number of times of execution of the main game is not within five times until the first pseudo game is executed, and the normal effect state process is ended while starting the roaring effect. To do.

  In the process of step S285, when it is determined that the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area 44e (YES), the effect control means 30 determines that the first pseudo game is It is determined that the remaining number of times of execution of this game is less than 5 until it is executed, a pre-reading effect is executed (S286), and the normal effect state process is terminated. In this process, the effect control means 30 executes an effect of displaying the pseudo game suggestion symbol in the prefetch display area corresponding to the display combination storing area in which the display combination is set in the prefetch display area 82 as the prefetching effect. Thus, it is possible to cause the player to predict the number of times that the main game is necessary until the first pseudo game is executed.

  In the process of step S284, when it is determined that the received start command is a start command transmitted by executing the first pseudo game process (YES), the effect control means 30 continues until the previous main game execution. It is determined that the latent state that has been completed is completed, and it is determined whether or not the set display combination is a weak rare combination in order to execute the process related to the first pseudo game (S287). In this process, when it is determined that the weak rare combination is set (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the CZ transition lottery based on the display combination (S288). In this process, the effect control means 30 acquires any one of 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 from the random number generation means 22, and compares the acquired random values with the CZ transition lottery table in the table storage means 41. . Note that the CZ transition lottery table includes a table storage unit 41 including a CZ transition lottery table referred to in the CZ transition lottery based on the display combination and a plurality of CZ transition lottery tables referred to in the CZ transition lottery based on the number of combos described later. Is remembered. Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the CZ state is won based on the comparison result between the acquired random number value and the CZ transition lottery table (S289).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation with the weak rare combination set as the display combination in the first display combination storage area 44a. In addition, when the reel effect determining means 29 generates a freeze and causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game, it is possible to display a temporary rare stop for a weak rare role. The CZ transition lottery is executed as an effect lottery regarding the state. Further, as described above, when the gaming state is the bonus establishment state, the reel machine 24 sets the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay to stop display impossible, so that the slot machine 1 performs the first simulation. At the time of execution of the game, the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) -BLA-RPA (RPB)” that constitutes a weak rare role than at the time of execution of this game and the symbol combination “RPA (RPB) that constitutes a strong rare role. “−BLB-RPA (RPB)” is configured to have a high probability of being able to display a temporary stop. Then, by turning on the combo flag, the slot machine 1 shifts to a latent state that continues until eight main games are executed, and after the latent state ends, executes the first pseudo game and also produces a reel effect. In this game that is executed from when the determining means 29 shifts to the latent state until the latent state is terminated, that is, with the combo flag set to ON, the first pseudo game is executed by executing the processing from step S283 to step S286. A pre-reading effect that suggests that is executed by the reel control means 24 is executed. As a result, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of executions from the game determined to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game until the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24. It is possible to continuously give a sense of expectation for the provision of an advantageous privilege throughout the game.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 can execute the first pseudo game after the eight main games when it is determined to execute the first pseudo game by the reel effect lottery. In order to do so, the display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h, and the remaining number of executions of the main game required until the latent state is completed until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos. Each time a display combination is set in the third display combination storage area 44c, the display combination is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h (see step S58 to step S64 in FIG. 17). Then, the reel effect determination means 29 keeps the combo flag in the ON state until the reel control means 24 executes the first pseudo game of the number of combos determined by the combo lottery (steps S72 to S74 in FIG. 17). As a result, the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 and then the state is shifted to the latent state, the first pseudo game is executed, the start lever SL is started, and the start switch 73 detects the start operation. Or when the time-out period has elapsed after a temporary stop of each reel, the freeze is terminated and the processing relating to this game is restarted and the display combination is set in the fifth display combination storage area 44e. The first pseudo game can be executed every time the main game is executed five times.

  For this reason, the effect control means 30 determines that the reel effect determination means 29 causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game and shifts to a latent state that continues until eight main games are executed. By executing the processing from step S283 to step S286, the display combination is set in the game that is executed until the latent state ends (in this embodiment, the game from five times before the latent state ends). Corresponding to the fact that the display combination storage area moves one byte at a time in the head direction of the display combination storage area 44 every time a game is executed, the pseudo game suggestion symbol displayed in the prefetch display area 82 is changed to one game. It is suggested that the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 by moving one prefetch display area from the fifth prefetch display area 82e to the first prefetch display area 82a every time. If the number of executions of the first pseudo game is less than the number of combos, the latent state ends and the first pseudo game is executed. Since the state where the flag is ON is continued, it is possible to shift from the process of step S283 to the process after step S284, and based on the fact that the display combination is set in the fifth display combination storage area 44e, By displaying the pseudo game suggestion symbol in the fifth prefetch display area 82e when shifting to the latent state again, the prefetch effect is continuously executed until the number of executions of the first pseudo game becomes the number of combos. ing.

  With this configuration, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation with the weak rare combination set as the display combination in the first display combination storage area 44a. In addition, when the reel effect determining means 29 generates a freeze and causes the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game, it is possible to display a temporary rare stop for a weak rare role. The CZ transition lottery is executed as an effect lottery regarding the state. Further, as described above, when the gaming state is the bonus establishment state, the reel control unit 24 sets the weak rare replay and the strong rare replay to stop display so that the slot machine 1 can perform the first simulation. At the time of execution of the game, it is configured such that the probability that the combination of symbols constituting the weak rare combination and the combination of symbols forming the strong rare combination can be displayed temporarily is higher than that at the time of execution of the game. . If the slot machine 1 determines that the reel control means 24 is to execute the first pseudo game, the slot machine 1 executes the first pseudo game after the latent state that continues until the eight main games are executed. At the same time, in this game executed in the latent state, a pre-reading effect that suggests that the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 is executed by the processing in steps S283 to S286. In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment keeps the combo flag on until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos determined by the combo lottery. After being executed by the control means 24, the state shifts to the latent state, and the prefetch effect is continuously executed until the number of executions of the first pseudo game reaches the number of combos. Thereby, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control unit 24 is determined by combo lottery from the game determined to cause the reel control unit 24 to execute the first pseudo game. It is possible to continuously give a sense of expectation for the provision of an advantageous privilege over the game executed in a plurality of latent states executed until the number of combos is reached.

  If it is determined in step S287 that the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a is not a weak rare combination (NO), the effect control means 30 has a strong display combination. It is determined whether or not the role is rare (S290). In this process, when it is determined that the strong rare combination is set (YES), the effect control means 30 executes an AT shift lottery based on the display combination (S291). In this process, the effect control means 30 acquires any one of 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 from the random number generation means 22 and compares the acquired random value with the AT transition lottery table in the table storage means 41. . Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the AT state is won based on the comparison result between the acquired random number value and the AT transition lottery table (S292). In this process, when it is determined that the AT state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 clears the normal effect state set in the effect state storage area 48 and sets the AT state. The process shifts to the AT state (S293), and the normal performance state ends.

  If it is determined in step S289 that the CZ state has not been won (NO), if it is determined in step S290 that the display combination is not a strong rare combination (NO) or in step S292, AT If it is determined that the state has not been won (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a CZ transition lottery based on the number of combos (S294). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines a CZ transition lottery table to be referred to from a plurality of CZ transition lottery tables stored in the table storage means 41 based on the stored value of the combo continuation counter in the counter storage means 43. Then, the effect control unit 30 acquires any one of 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 from the random number generation unit 22 and compares it with the CZ transition lottery table determined to refer to the acquired random number value. In the CZ transition lottery based on the number of combos, a CZ transition lottery table having more random numbers associated with CZ state winning is used as the stored value of the combo continuation counter is larger.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the CZ state has been won based on the comparison result between the acquired random value and the CZ transition lottery table (S295). In this process, when it is determined that the CZ state is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the normal effect state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the CZ state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the selected CZ state is the special CZ state (S296). In this process, if it is determined that the special CZ state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the special CZ state flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S297). In this process, the effect control means 30 turns on the special CZ state flag in order to execute the process related to the special CZ state as the CZ state in the next and subsequent games. After performing the process of step S297 or in the process of step S296, if it is determined that the selected CZ state is not the special CZ state (NO), the effect control means 30 is set in the effect state storage area 48. When the normal performance state is cleared and the CZ state is set, the CZ state is entered (S298), and the normal performance state is terminated.

<CZ state processing>
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the CZ state process executed in step S274 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the CZ start flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S301). In this process, the effect control means 30 performs a re-lottery process (when the display combination is set in any of the display combination storage areas 44 when the display state shifts from the normal display state to the CZ state) 32) has been executed, or when the display combination is not set in the display combination storage area 44 at the time of transition to the production state and the re-lottery process need not be executed, the CZ start flag set is ON. It is determined whether or not there is.

  In the process of step S301, when it is determined that the CZ start flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the combo flag is ON (S302). In this process, when it is determined that the combo flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the combo re-lottery flag is ON (S303). In this process, when it is determined that the combo re-lottery flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery process and that the re-lottery process has not been executed yet. Then, it is determined whether or not the replay is won by the internal lottery (S304). If the replay is won (YES), it is set by the batting order setting process executed in step S26 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 15). The effect which notifies the batting order of the performed clear replay is executed (S305), and the CZ state process is terminated. By notifying the clear replay batting order at the time of winning the replay, the slot machine 1 allows the player to press the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the clear replay batting order and establishes a predetermined cancellation condition. A lottery process can be executed. If it is determined in step S304 that the replay is not won (NO), the effect control unit 30 ends the CZ state process.

  When it is determined that the combo flag is OFF in the process of step S302 (NO) or when it is determined that the combo re-lottery flag is ON in the process of step S303 (YES), the effect control means 30 It is determined that there is no need to execute the re-lottery process or that the re-lottery process has been executed, and the CZ start flag is turned ON (S306). After performing the process of step S306 or in the process of step S301, if it is determined that the CZ start flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special CZ flag is ON. (S307). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether the effect state to be executed is the normal CZ state or the special CZ state by determining whether or not the special CZ flag is ON.

  In the process of step S307, when it is determined that the special CZ state flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the special CZ state process (S308) and ends the CZ state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not to shift the effect state to the AT state according to the execution result of the third pseudo game process (see FIG. 19), and whether or not to provide the effect mode. To decide.

  If it is determined in step S307 that the special CZ state flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether the CZ state selected flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON. Is determined (S309). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether the CZ state selected flag that is set when the player selects which of the first CZ state to the third CZ state is to be executed is ON. To determine whether or not the player has selected the normal CZ state. Further, in this process, when it is determined that the CZ state selected flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the CZ state process. That is, the effect control unit 30 is configured not to start the effect process in the CZ state until the player determines which normal CZ state of the first CZ state to the third CZ state is to be executed. In addition, the effect control means 30 is one of the first CZ state to the third CZ state when the game progresses before the player decides which normal CZ state to execute from the first CZ state to the third CZ state. Any one of them may be automatically determined.

  If it is determined in the process of step S309 that the CZ state selected flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the first CZ flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON. Is determined (S310). In this process, when it is determined that the first CZ flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the first CZ state process (S311) and ends the CZ state process. In this process, the production control means 30 determines whether or not to increase the winning probability in the AT transition lottery process based on the winning combination or display combination for each game as the first CZ state by the probability product lottery process. Then, the AT transition lottery process is executed based on the winning probability determined by the probability product lottery process after the game of the preset number of games (for example, 15 games) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S310 that the first CZ flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether the second CZ flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON. (S312). In this process, when it is determined that the second CZ flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the second CZ state process (S313) and ends the CZ state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 executes the AT shift lottery process based on the winning combination or the display combination for each game in the second CZ state, and a game with a preset number of games (for example, 10 games). The game AT transition lottery process is executed until. In the present embodiment, the second CZ state is configured such that the winning probability of the AT transition lottery based on the display combination is higher than the winning probability of the AT transition lottery based on the winning combination.

  In the process of step S312, when it is determined that the second CZ flag is OFF (NO), the effect control unit 30 executes the third CZ state process (S314) and ends the CZ state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 accumulates the effect signal output from the decision switch 76 when the player presses the decision button JGB in the third CZ state, and uses the accumulated value to perform AT transition lottery. Execute the process. In addition, every time the effect signal output from the determination switch 76 is received, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the effect signal is to be accumulated by a continuous pressing lottery.

<Second CZ state processing>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second CZ state process executed in step S313 of the CZ state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the CZ state counter in the counter storage means 43 is 0 (S321). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the second CZ state by determining whether or not the CZ state counter is 0, and the CZ state counter When it is determined that the stored value is 0 (YES), 10 is set in the CZ state counter (S322).

  After performing the process of step S322 or in the process of step S321, when it is determined that the stored value of the CZ state counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 performs an internal lottery process (see FIG. 15). The AT transfer lottery is executed based on the winning combination or the display combination set in the first display combination storage area 44a (S323). In this process, when the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a, the effect control means 30 sets the display combination in the first display combination storage area 44a based on the set display combination. If not, the AT shift lottery table to be referred to is determined from the plurality of AT shift lottery tables stored in the table storage means 41 based on the winning combination of the internal lottery. Then, the effect control means 30 acquires any one of 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 from the random number generation means 22 and compares it with the AT transition lottery table determined to refer to the acquired random number values. In the AT transition lottery in the second CZ state, the AT transition lottery table determined based on the display combination is associated with the AT state winning more than the AT transition lottery table determined based on the winning combination of the internal lottery. Random numbers are increasing.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the pre-reading effect until the immediately preceding game when the display combination is set in the display combination storage area 44 when the display state shifts from the normal display state to the CZ state. Although the process is being executed, the process related to the second CZ state is executed after executing the re-lottery process before starting the second CZ state or executing the first pseudo game based on the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44. Since it is configured to execute, even if the player is aware of the appearance of the display combination by the pre-reading effect, the expected value for winning the AT state in the second CZ state is prevented from rising excessively. Can do.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the AT state is won based on the comparison result between the acquired random number value and the determined AT transition lottery table (S324). In this process, when it is determined that the AT state has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 clears the CZ state set in the effect state storage area 48 and sets the AT state, thereby allowing the AT state. Transition to the state (S325), the CZ state counter is cleared because the CZ state ends in the current game (S326).

  In the process of step S324, when it is determined that the AT state is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 subtracts 1 from the CZ state counter since one game is executed in the second CZ state ( S327). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the CZ state counter is 0 (S328). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the CZ state counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the second CZ state process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stored value of the CZ state counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the second CZ state of the preset number of games and is not won in the AT transition lottery. Therefore, the CZ state set in the effect state storage area 48 is cleared, and the normal effect state is set, thereby shifting to the normal effect state (S329). After executing the processing of step S326 or step S329, the effect control means 30 turns off the CZ start flag (S330) and executes the second CZ flag in order to execute a game based on an effect state different from the CZ state from the next game. Is turned OFF (S331), the CZ state selected flag is turned OFF (S332), various flags relating to the second CZ state are initialized, and the second CZ state process is ended.

<Third CZ state processing>
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the third CZ state process executed in step S314 of the CZ state process shown in FIG.

  Here, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is based on the fact that the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation when the player selects the third CZ state in the normal CZ state. The effect control means 30 is caused to execute the processing of step S341 to step S343, the pressing operation acceptance flag is turned ON, and the pressing operation instruction effect is instructed to instruct the player to press the determination button JGB. When the pressing operation acceptance flag is turned ON, the effect control means 30 shifts to the detection state.

  When the determination button JGB is pressed with the pressing operation reception flag turned ON, the slot machine 1 transmits from the operation reception means 28 when the determination button JGB is pressed and the determination switch 76 detects the pressing operation. When the effect control means 30 receives the input command to be executed, the processes of steps S696 to S698 of the input command reception process shown in FIG. 56 described later are executed. Here, in the slot machine 1, when the effect control unit 30 executes the processes of steps S <b> 696 to S <b> 698 and the determination button JGB is pressed by the player, the effect storage counter of the counter storage unit 43 is set to 1. to add. Then, the slot machine 1 causes the effect control means 30 to execute the pressing operation continuous lottery in step S699. The slot machine 1 executes the processing of step S701 and step S702 when the determination button JGB is pressed after executing the processing of step S700 until it becomes non-winning (losing) in the pressing operation continuous lottery. By executing the processing from step S696 to step S699 again, the state where the pressing operation acceptance flag is turned on is maintained and the detection state is continued.

  When the push operation continuation lottery is not won (lost) in the process of step S699, the slot machine 1 causes the effect control means 30 to execute the processes of step S701 and step S702 to turn off the push operation acceptance flag. This ends the detection state. Then, in the game that is executed after the game in which the detection state has ended, the slot machine 1 causes the effect control unit 30 to execute step S344 on the basis of the start operation of the start lever SL and the start switch 73 detecting the start operation. The process is executed, the winning probability in the AT transition lottery is determined based on the stored value of the effect accumulation counter, that is, the number of times the determination button JGB is pressed in the detection state, and the AT transition lottery is executed based on the corresponding selection probability. Based on the lottery result, the process of step S346 or the process of step S347, which is a process related to the transition of the production state, is executed.

  In the slot machine 1, the stop switch 74 detects the pressing operation of the stop buttons B1 to B3 while the pressing operation acceptance flag is ON, and the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 stop, so that the game can be performed. When the process proceeds, the third CZ state automatic execution process of FIG. 54 described later is executed, and each time the winning operation selection lottery of step S632 is won, the stored value of the effect accumulation counter is incremented by 1 in the process of step S631, and the process proceeds to step S632. Based on the fact that the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation after the push operation continuation lottery is not won (lost), the effect control means 30 is caused to execute the process of step S344, and the effect accumulation is performed. The stored value of the counter, that is, the lottery for the pressing operation continuation in step S632 of the third CZ state automatic execution process is won. The winning probability in the AT transition lottery is determined based on the number of times selected, the AT transition lottery is executed based on the corresponding selection probability, and the process of step S346 or the process of step S347 is executed based on the lottery result. To do.

  Below, the detail of each control process which the production | presentation control means 30 performs at the time of execution of a 3rd CZ state process is described. First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the pressing operation end flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S341). In this process, when it is determined that the pressing operation end flag is not ON (NO), the effect control means 30 is a game immediately after the current game shifts to the third CZ state and a predetermined detection condition is satisfied. With the effect of instructing the player to depress the decision button JGB by the effect device 80 to turn on the depressing operation acceptance flag in order to shift to the detection state (S342) and cause the player to depress the determination button JGB. A certain pressing operation instruction effect is executed (S343), and the third CZ state process is terminated.

  In the process of step S341, when it is determined that the pressing operation end flag is ON (YES), the effect control unit 30 performs the pressing operation of the determination button JGB while the detection state continues in the previous game. The automatic transfer lottery means 30b determines that the addition process has been performed and the automatic transfer lottery means 30b performs an AT transfer lottery as an effect transfer lottery based on the stored value of the effect accumulation counter in the counter storage means 43 (S344). In this process, the effect control means 30 first determines the number of random values associated with the AT state winning among 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 based on the stored value of the effect accumulation counter. Here, the number of random values associated with the AT state winning is configured to increase as the stored value of the effect accumulation counter increases. Then, the effect control unit 30 acquires any one of 32768 random values from 0 to 32767 from the random number generation unit 22, and determines whether or not the acquired random value is a random value associated with the AT state winning. An AT shift lottery is performed to determine whether or not.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the production state shifts from the normal production state to the CZ state and the third CZ state is selected, the cumulative value of the number of times the determination switch 76 detects the pressing operation. The winning probabilities in the AT transition lottery are different, and the player's expectation for the subsequent effects can be changed by the number of pressing operations detected by the determination switch 76, and the player's expectation can be changed. Can improve interest in

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the AT state has been won based on the comparison result between the acquired random value and the random value associated with the AT state winning (S345). In this process, when it is determined that the AT state has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 clears the CZ state set in the effect state storage area 48 and sets the AT state, thereby allowing the AT state. The state is shifted to (S346).

  In the process of step S345, when it is determined that the AT state is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the pressing operation of the decision button JGB by the player, and continues pressing if the detection state does not continue. Since it is determined by the lottery means 30a and the AT transition lottery based on the production cumulative counter is executed and the AT transition lottery is not won, the CZ state set in the production state storage area 48 is cleared and the normal production is performed. By setting the state, it shifts to the normal performance state (S347). After executing the process of step S346 or step S347, the effect control means 30 turns off the CZ start flag to execute a game based on the effect state different from the CZ state from the next game (S348), and the third CZ flag. Is turned off (S349), the CZ state selected flag is turned off (S350), and the pressing operation end flag is turned off (S351), and various flags relating to the third CZ state are initialized, and the third CZ state process is terminated. To do.

<Special CZ state processing>
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special CZ state process executed in step S308 of the CZ state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special CZ state execution flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S361). In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 performs a process related to the transition of the effect state and a process related to the provision of the effect mode as each process in the special CZ state in accordance with the execution of the third pseudo game process (see FIG. 19). Since it is configured to execute, in the process of step S361, it is determined whether or not a special CZ state execution flag that is set when preparations for executing each process in the special CZ state are completed.

  In the process of step S361, when it is determined that the special CZ state execution flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 has the third pseudo game flag set when the third pseudo game state is executed. It is determined whether or not there is (S362). In this process, when it is determined that the third pseudo game flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines that the current game is the first third pseudo game, and the next and subsequent games. In step S363, the special CZ state execution flag is turned ON to enable each process in the special CZ state.

  In the process of step S362, when it is determined that the third pseudo game flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the winning combination in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 15) is replay. Determination is made (S364). In this process, when it is determined that the winning combination is not replay (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the special CZ state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning combination is replay (YES), the effect control means 30 provides an effect of notifying the batting order of the transition replay set in the batting order setting process executed in step S26 of the internal lottery process. Execute (S365) and end the special CZ state process. By notifying the striking order of the transition replay at the time of winning the replay, the slot machine 1 causes the player to press down the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the order of transition replay, and changes the main effect state from the first main effect state to the first. It is possible to shift to the three main effect state and execute the third pseudo game process.

  After performing the process of step S363 or in the process of step S361, when it is determined that the special CZ state execution flag is ON (YES), the effect control unit 30 sets the special CZ state counter of the counter storage unit 43. It is determined whether or not the stored value is 0 (S366). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the special CZ state by determining whether or not the special CZ state counter is 0, and the special CZ state counter. If it is determined that the stored value of the state counter is 0 (YES), 5 is set in the special CZ state counter (S367).

  After performing the process of step S367 or in the process of step S366, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ state counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 is stored in the first display combination storing area 44a. It is determined whether or not the set display combination is the third pseudo game display combination (S368). In this process, when it is determined that the third pseudo game display combination is set (YES), the effect control means 30 displays the third pseudo game display combination temporarily stopped in the current third pseudo game. And the special CZ winning counter in the counter storage means 43 is incremented by 1 (S369).

  In the process of step S368, when it is determined that the third pseudo game display combination is not set (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a special CZ internal lottery (S370). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special CZ internal lottery is won (S371). In this process, if it is determined that the special CZ internal lottery is won (YES), the effect control means 30 adds 1 to the special CZ internal winning counter in the counter storage means 43 (S372). In these processes, the effect control means 30 executes a special CZ internal lottery that determines whether or not to add 1 to the special CZ internal winning counter in the third pseudo game state in which the third pseudo game display combination is not temporarily stopped. When the special CZ internal lottery is won, 1 is added to the special CZ internal winning counter.

  After performing the processing of step S369 and step S372 or in the processing of step S371, when it is determined that the special CZ internal lottery is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 performs one third pseudo game. Since each process in the special CZ state based on the execution of is executed, the special CZ state counter is decremented by 1 (S373). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the special CZ state counter is 0 (S374). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ state counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 4 (S375). ). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is not 4 (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the special CZ state process. In the processes of step S374 and step S375, the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not a condition for shifting to the process of determining whether or not to shift the effect state from the special CZ state is satisfied.

  If it is determined in the process of step S374 that the stored value of the special CZ state counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 determines the stored value of the special CZ winning counter and the stored value of the special CZ internal winning counter. It is determined whether or not the sum of is 4 or more (S376). In the process of step S375, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 4 (YES) or in the process of step S376, the sum of the stored value of the special CZ winning counter and the stored value of the special CZ internal winning counter Is determined to be 4 or more (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the special addition special state in the AT state after the end of the special CZ state as the privilege effect process based on the third effect mode. In addition, the special addition special flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is turned ON (S377). As described above, the effect control means 30 according to the present embodiment also uses the result of the special CZ internal lottery even when the number of times the third pseudo game display combination is temporarily stopped in the third pseudo game state is less than four times. The third pseudo game display combination is configured to be handled in the same manner as when the temporary stop display is displayed four times. For this reason, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts to the AT state after the special CZ state ends and plays the game even if the third pseudo game display combination is not temporarily stopped in the third pseudo game state. There is a possibility that an effect mode advantageous to the player will be given with respect to the grant of the medium, and the player can have a sense of expectation even when the third pseudo game display combination is not temporarily stopped and displayed. .

  After executing the process of step S377, the effect control means 30 sets 4 to the special CZ winning counter (S378). If it is determined that the sum of the stored value of the special CZ winning counter and the stored value of the special CZ internal winning counter is less than 4 after the processing of step S378 or in the processing of step S376 (NO), Since the control means 30 does not use the special CZ internal winning counter in the subsequent processing, the special CZ internal winning counter is cleared (S379).

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 1 or more (S380). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 1 or more (YES), the effect control means 30 clears the CZ state set in the effect state storage area 48, and the AT state. To set the AT state (S381). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 2 or more (S382). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 2 or more (YES), the effect control means 30 performs the AT after the end of the special CZ state as the privilege effect process based on the first effect mode. In order to add the number of performances in the state, 100 is set in the AT number addition counter of the counter storage means 43 (S383). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 3 or more (S384). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 3 or more (YES), the effect control means 30 performs the AT after the end of the special CZ state as the privilege effect process based on the second effect mode. In order to execute the specialization state in the state, the specialization flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is turned ON (S385). Next, the effect control means 30 turns on the special AT start flag stored in the flag storage area 42 (S386). In this process, the effect control means 30 performs the privilege effect process based on the first effect mode, the second effect mode or the first effect mode to the third effect mode in the AT state after the end of the special CZ state. Before executing the AT state start process to be executed at the start of the state, execution of an extra special state that is a special effect process based on the second effect mode and special specialization that is a special effect process based on the third effect mode In order to enable execution of the state, the special AT start flag is turned ON.

  In this way, the effect control means 30 has the first effect mode to the third effect mode that are configured so that the degree of advantage for the player with respect to the provision of the game medium varies stepwise, and is executed continuously. As the number of temporary stops of the third pseudo game display combination increases, a more advantageous production mode is selected by the player. With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the bonus effect processing based on any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes according to the number of times the third pseudo game display combination is won during the execution of the third pseudo game. Since it is determined whether or not to execute when the state is shifted to the state, and the third pseudo game is continuously executed, the effect mode selected when the state is always shifted to the AT state during the execution of the third pseudo game. A sense of expectation can be given to the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the slot machine 1 is based on an effect mode that is more advantageous to the player with respect to the provision of game media when the game machine shifts to the AT state as the number of times the third pseudo game display combination is won during the execution of the third pseudo game increases. Since the bonus effect process is executed, the expectation given to the player during the consecutive third pseudo game increases every time the third pseudo game display combination is won, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .

  In the process of step S380, when it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is less than 1, that is, 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the third pseudo game once in the third pseudo game state. It is determined that the display combination is not temporarily stopped and the number of wins in the special CZ internal lottery is less than 4 and the condition for shifting to the AT state is not satisfied, and the CZ state set in the effect state storage area 48 is determined. By clearing and setting the normal performance state, the process shifts to the normal performance state (S387). After executing the processing of step S386 and step S387, if it is determined that the stored value of the special CZ winning counter is 1 in the processing of step S382 (NO) or the stored value of the special CZ winning counter in the processing of step S384 When it is determined that is 2 (NO), the effect control means 30 turns off the special CZ state flag to execute a game based on the effect state different from the CZ state from the next game (S388). By turning off the special CZ state execution flag (S389), various flags relating to the special CZ state are initialized, and the special CZ state process is ended.

<AT status processing>
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the AT state process executed in step S272 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special AT start flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S401). In this process, the effect control means 30 has a special AT start flag that is set when the second effect mode or the second effect mode and the third effect mode are selected in the special CZ state process (see FIG. 40). It is determined whether or not it is ON.

  In the process of step S401, when it is determined that the special AT start flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 has the AT state start time process execution flag stored in the flag storage area 42 turned ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S402). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the AT state start time process execution completion flag set by the execution of the AT state start time process is ON, so that in the current game, the normal AT It is determined which of the process related to the state and the AT state start process is to be executed.

  In the process of step S402, when it is determined that the AT state start process execution completion flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 has the main effect state set in the main effect state storage area 47 as the first effect state. It is determined whether or not the two main effects are in effect (S403). In this process, when it is determined that the main effect state is the second main effect state (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role re-lottery flag is ON (S404). In this process, when it is determined that the rare combination re-lottery flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the combo flag is ON (S405). In this process, when it is determined that the combo flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery process and that the re-lottery process has not yet been executed, It is determined whether or not the replay is won by the internal lottery (S406), and if the replay is won (YES), it is set in the batting order setting process executed in step S26 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 15). An effect of informing the clear replay batting order is executed (S407), and the AT state process is terminated. By notifying the clear replay batting order at the time of winning the replay, the slot machine 1 allows the player to press the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the clear replay batting order and establishes a predetermined cancellation condition. A lottery process can be executed. If it is determined in step S406 that the replay is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state process.

  In the process of step S404, when it is determined that the combo re-lottery flag is ON (YES) or in the process of step S405, it is determined that the combo flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 It is determined that there is no need to execute the re-lottery process or that the re-lottery process has been executed, the AT state start time process is executed (S408), and the AT state process is terminated. In this process, the effect control means 30 sets the AT number counter in accordance with the execution result of the second pseudo game start process executed at the start of the second pseudo game state in the second pseudo game process (see FIG. 18). Determine the value to be used.

  If it is determined in step S403 that the main effect state is not the second main effect state (NO), the effect control means 30 has won one of the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 in the internal lottery. It is determined whether or not (S409). In this process, when it is determined that none of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (YES), the effect control means 30 performs a winning assist effect for informing the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B. (S410), and the AT state process is terminated. In this way, the production control means 30 informs the production device 80 of the correct batting order to win the bells A and B when winning the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 in response to the transition of the production state to the AT state. It is configured to be controllable. The slot machine 1 is stopped in the correct answer order in which the player wins the bell A and the bell B by notifying the correct answer order in which the bell A and the bell B are won when the hit order bell 1 to the hit order bell 8 is won. By pressing the button B1 to the stop button B3, causing the stop order determination unit 24a to detect a specific operation mode, and establishing a transition condition for shifting from the first main effect state to the second main effect state, The main performance state can be changed according to the transition.

  If it is determined in the process of step S401 that the special AT start flag is ON (YES) or if it is determined in the process of step S402 that the AT state start time process execution completion flag is ON (YES), The effect control means 30 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S411). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the pseudo bonus state process (S412) and ends the AT state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 can be selected by the player and the pseudo bonus addition process for determining whether or not to add a value to the AT number addition counter is different from the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state. One pseudo bonus state is executed, which is a special pseudo bonus state in which the pseudo bonus addition process executed in each of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state in one game is executed simultaneously.

  In the process of step S411, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special addition special flag is ON (S413). In this process, when it is determined that the special addition special flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the special addition special state process (S414) and ends the AT state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 determines a value to be set in the AT number addition counter according to the execution result of the special addition specialized reel control process (see FIG. 29). Each control process executed in the special addition special state process constitutes a bonus effect process when the third effect mode is selected in the present embodiment.

  In the process of step S413, when it is determined that the special addition special flag is OFF (NO), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the special addition flag is ON (S415). In this process, when it is determined that the additional specialization flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the additional specialization state process (S416) and ends the AT state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 executes an AT number addition special lottery for drawing a value to be set in the AT number addition counter for each game. In addition, each control process performed in the specialization state process for addition constitutes a bonus effect process when the second effect mode is selected in the present embodiment.

  In the process of step S415, when it is determined that the additional specialization flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the normal additional flag is ON (S417). In this process, when it is determined that the normal addition flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the normal addition state process (S418) and ends the AT state process. In this process, the production control means 30 determines whether to shift to the AT number addition lottery for lottering the value to be set in the AT number addition counter for each game, and to the addition special state or the special addition special state. A state transition lottery for lottery is executed. In addition, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not to shift to the rare role high probability state in which the rare role high probability state continues regardless of the number of games at the end of the normal addition state processing, and regardless of the number of games. When the rare role high-accuracy state has shifted to the continued rare role high-precision state, a normal addition end process for determining whether or not to end the rare role high-precision state is executed.

  In the process of step S417, when it is determined that the normal addition flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 executes the normal AT state process (S419) and ends the AT state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 causes the effect device 80 to execute a winning assist effect for notifying the batting order in which the bell A and the bell B are won when the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 are won, and the pseudo bonus state and the normal addition. A lottery process related to the transition to the state and a lottery process for determining whether or not to change the display combination lottery table in the second simulated gaming state are executed. When it is determined that the display combination lottery table in the second simulated gaming state is to be changed, the batting order notification effect of the high-accuracy transition replay and the batting order notification effect of the high-accuracy end replay are executed when the replay is won.

<Processing at the start of AT state>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the AT state start time process executed in step S408 of the AT state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the second pseudo game start display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (S431). In this process, when it is determined that the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game is set (YES), the effect control means 30 determines that the process at the start of the second pseudo game is continued, The AT number lottery process is executed, the winning result is added to the AT number counter (S432), and the AT state start process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display combination at the start of the second pseudo game is not set (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that the second pseudo game start time process is ended, and the normal from the next game. In order to start the AT state, the AT state start process executed flag is turned ON (S433), and the AT state start process is terminated. In this way, the effect control means 30 indicates that the stored value added to the AT number counter in step S432 becomes 0 before the AT state start process execution flag is turned ON, at the start of the normal AT state. Set to AT end condition.

<Normal AT status processing>
43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the normal AT state process executed in step S419 of the AT state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the AT number addition counter is 0 (S441). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the AT number addition counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 adds the stored value of the AT number addition counter to the AT number counter (S442). The number addition counter is cleared (S443). In these processes, the effect control means 30 adds the AT number to the AT number counter when executing the normal AT state process when the value is set in the AT number addition counter by each process capable of setting the value in the AT number addition counter. The stored value of the counter is added.

  After executing the process of step S443 or in the process of step S441, if it is determined that the stored value of the AT number addition counter is 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 will display the first display combination storage area 44a to 44a. It is determined whether or not a display combination is set in the fifth display combination storage area 44e (S444). In this process, when it is determined that the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area 44e (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the prefetch effect (S445). ). In this process, the effect control means 30 displays the pseudo game suggestion symbol in the area corresponding to the display combination storing area where the display combination is set in the pre-read display area 82 as the pre-reading effect, and how many times the game is performed. It is notified whether or not the pseudo game is executed after executing.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not a display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (S446). In this process, when it is determined that the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (YES), the effect control means 30 executes a pseudo bonus transfer lottery (S447). In this process, the effect control means 30 draws a lottery to determine whether the effect state shifts to either the normal pseudo bonus state as the normal privilege state or the special pseudo bonus state as the special privilege state. Execute.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the normal pseudo bonus state or the special pseudo bonus state is won (S448). In this process, if it is determined that either the normal pseudo bonus state or the special pseudo bonus state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the process related to the pseudo bonus state in the next game. Then, the pseudo bonus flag is turned on (S449). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the selected pseudo bonus state is the special pseudo bonus state (S450). In this process, if it is determined that the special pseudo bonus state has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the process related to the special pseudo bonus state among the processes related to the pseudo bonus state in the next and subsequent games. Therefore, the special pseudo bonus flag is turned on (S451).

  After performing the process of step S451 or in the process of step S450, if it is determined that the normal pseudo bonus state is won (NO), the effect control means 30 executes the rare role establishment auxiliary effect (S452), The normal AT state process is terminated. In this process, the effect control means 30 causes the effect device 80 to execute the establishment assist effect instructing to aim at the symbol constituting the display role in the middle stage of the second reel R2.

  In the process of step S444, when it is determined that no display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area 44e (NO) or in the process of step S446, the first display combination storage area 44a. If it is determined that no display combination is set (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won in the internal lottery (S453). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (YES), the effect control means 30 produces an award winning effect that informs the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B. The apparatus 80 is executed (S454). By causing the stage device 80 to execute the winning assistance effect, the slot machine 1 can win the bell A and the bell B in which the number of medals to be paid out is larger than the predetermined number when the winning order bell 1 to the hit order bell 8 is won in the AT state. Can be awarded to the player, and the player can earn medals.

  In the process of step S453, when it is determined that none of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the replay is won by the internal lottery. (S455). In this process, when it is determined that the replay is won (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the rare role variation counter in the counter storage means 43 is 0 (S456). In this process, the effect control means 30 refers to the display combination lottery table E in the second pseudo game display combination lottery process (see step S89 in FIG. 18) until a predetermined number of games are executed (see step S89 in FIG. 18). Hereinafter, it is determined whether or not the stored value of the rare combination variation counter that counts the number of played games is 0.

  In the process of step S456, when it is determined that the stored value of the rare role variation counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 has the rare role high-accuracy flag stored in the flag storage area 42 turned ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S457). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high probability flag that is set when the rare role high probability state continues regardless of the number of games is ON.

  If it is determined in step S457 that the rare role high-accuracy flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 has the finite rare role high-accuracy flag stored in the flag storage area 42 ON. It is determined whether or not (S458). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not a finite rare role high-accuracy flag that is set when shifting to a rare role high-accuracy state in which the number of games is counted by the rare role variation counter is ON. If it is determined that the finite rare role high-accuracy flag is OFF (NO), a rare role high-accuracy state lottery for drawing whether or not to shift to the rare role high-accuracy state is executed (S459). Next, the production control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high-definition state lottery has been won (S460). In this process, when it is determined that the rare role high probability state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the finite rare role high probability flag (S461). As described above, when the transition to the rare role high-accuracy state is determined during the normal AT state, the effect control means 30 can shift to the rare role high-accuracy state where the number of games in which the rare role high-precision state continues is limited. Is configured to do.

  If it is determined in step S457 that the rare role high-accuracy flag is ON (YES), or if it is determined in step S458 that the finite rare role high-accuracy flag is ON (YES), The control means 30 determines whether or not the rare bonus state start flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S462). In this process, the production control means 30 determines the transition to the rare role high-probability state, and the rare role high-probability set when the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed down in the strike order of the high-precision transition replay. It is determined whether or not the state start flag is ON.

  After performing the process of step S461 or in the process of step S462, if it is determined that the rare role high-accuracy state start flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 executes in step S26 of the internal lottery process. The effect which notifies the batting order of the high-accuracy transition replay set in the batting order setting process is executed (S463). The slot machine 1 determines the transition to the rare role high probability state and informs the player of the high probability transition replay by notifying the batting order of the high probability transition replay when the game in the rare role high probability state is not started. The stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed down in the order of hitting, and the high-accuracy state flag is set to ON from the processing of steps S213 to S215 of the main effect state transition processing (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and the second simulated game display It is possible to execute a game in a rare role high-probability state with reference to the display combination lottery table E in the combination lottery process.

  In the process of step S462, when it is determined that the rare role high probability state start flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the rare role high probability end flag stored in the flag storage area 42. It is determined whether or not (S464). In this process, the effect control means 30 sets a rare role high probability end flag that is set when a condition for ending the rare role high probability state is satisfied when the rare role high probability state continues regardless of the number of games. It is determined whether or not is ON.

  In the process of step S464, when it is determined that the rare role high probability end flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 turns on the finite rare role high accuracy end flag stored in the flag storage area 42. It is determined whether or not (S465). In this process, the production control means 30 is set when the condition for ending the rare role high-accuracy state is satisfied in the rare role high-precision state where the number of games in which the rare role high-precision state continues is finite. It is determined whether or not the high probability end flag is ON.

  When it is determined in the process of step S464 that the rare role high probability end flag is ON (YES), or when it is determined in step S465 that the finite rare role high probability end flag is ON (YES). The effect control means 30 executes the effect of informing the striking order of the high-accuracy end replay set in the striking order setting process (S466). In a game in which the end condition of the rare role high probability state is established, the slot machine 1 notifies the player of the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the high order end replay stroke order. The display combination lottery table to be referred to in the second pseudo game display combination lottery process is displayed from the display combination lottery table E by making the pressing operation to turn off the high-accuracy state flag from the processing of step S216 to step S218 of the main effect state transition process. By changing to the role lottery table D, it is possible to end the rare role high probability state.

  After performing the processing of step S454 and step S463, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not won in the processing of step S448 (NO), or when it is determined that the replay is not won in the processing of step S455 ( NO), in the process of step S456, when it is determined that the stored value of the rare role variation counter is not 0 (NO), in the process of step S460, when it is determined that the rare role highly probable state is not won (NO) ) Or in the process of step S465, when it is determined that the finite rare role high probability end flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not to shift the effect state to the normal addition state. A normal addition state shift lottery is executed (S467). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the normal addition state is won (S468). In this process, when it is determined that the normal addition state is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the normal AT state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal added state has been won (NO), the effect control means 30 sets the normal added state flag to ON in order to execute the process related to the normal added state in the next game (S469). The normal AT state process is terminated.

<Normal addition state processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the normal addition state process executed in step S418 of the AT state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won in the internal lottery (S471). In this process, if it is determined that any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (YES), the effect control means 30 produces an award winning effect that informs the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B. The apparatus 80 is executed (S472).

  When it is determined that none of the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 is won after the process of step S472 or in the process of step S471 (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the state transition lottery. Execute (S473). In this process, the effect control means 30 performs a state transition lottery that can win either the AT number addition for setting a value in the AT number addition counter, the transition to the specialization state, or the continuation of the normal addition state. Run.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the AT number addition is won (S474). In this process, when it is determined that the AT number is added (YES), the effect control means 30 draws the added number of the medals to be paid out in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as “added number”). The AT number addition lottery is executed, and the AT number addition lottery determined by the AT number addition lottery is set in the AT number addition counter (S475).

  In the process of step S474, when it is determined that the AT number extra is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the extra special state is won (S476). In this process, if it is determined that the specialization state for winning is won (YES), the production control means 30 draws whether or not the production state is shifted to the specialization state with special production. Is executed (S477). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special addition special state has been won (S478). In this process, when it is determined that the special addition special state has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the special addition special flag (S479).

  After performing the process of step S479 or in the process of step S478, if it is determined that the special addition special state is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 turns on the special addition flag ( S480). As described above, the effect control means 30 is configured to start the specialization state after the special specialization state ends when the special specialization state is won.

  In the process of step S476, when it is determined that the added special state has not been won (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the continuation of the normal added state has been won (S481). In this process, when it is determined that the continuation of the normal added state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the normal added state process.

  After performing the processing of step S475 and step S480 or in the processing of step S481, when determining that the continuation of the normal addition state is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the normal addition state end process. Is executed (S482), and the normal addition state processing is terminated. In this process, the production control means 30 determines whether or not to shift to the rare role high-precision state in which the rare role high-precision state continues regardless of the number of games, as the normal addition state ends. When transitioning to the rare role high probability state where the rare role high probability state continues regardless of the number of games, the normal added state end process is executed to determine whether or not to end the rare role high probability state. .

<Normal end-up process>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the normal added state end process executed in step S482 of the normal added state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high-accuracy flag is ON (S491). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high-accuracy flag is ON, and shifts to a rare role high-precision state in which the rare role high-precision state continues regardless of the number of games. And whether or not to end the rare role high probability state when the rare role high probability state continues regardless of the number of games. It is determined which of the processing is executed.

  In the process of step S491, when it is determined that the rare role high probability flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a rare role high probability state transition lottery (S492). Next, the production control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high-probability state has been won (S493). In this process, when it is determined that the rare role high probability state is won (YES), the effect control means 30 shifts to the rare role high probability state in which the rare role high probability state continues regardless of the number of games. Therefore, in order to initialize the processing of the finite rare role high-probability state, it is determined whether or not the stored value of the rare role variation counter is 0 (S494). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the rare combination variation counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 clears the rare combination variation counter (S495). After performing the process of step S495 or in the process of step S494, if it is determined that the stored value of the rare role change counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the rare role high probability flag. (S496).

  If it is determined in step S491 that the rare role high probability flag is ON (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a rare role high probability state end lottery (S497). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high-probability state has been won (S498). In this process, if it is determined that the rare role high probability end state has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the rare role high probability end flag (S499).

  After executing the processing of step S496 and step S499, if it is determined in the processing of step S493 that the rare role high probability state has not been won (NO), or the processing of step S498 is won to end the rare role high probability state If it is determined that it has not been made (NO), the effect control means 30 turns off the normal addition state flag and ends the normal addition state end process.

  As described above, when the transition to the rare role high probability state is determined in the normal addition state end process, the production control unit 30 ends the rare role high probability state in the normal addition state end process. Then, it is comprised so that it can transfer to the rare role high-precision state which continues until it determines.

<Additional special processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the extra special state process executed in step S416 of the AT state process shown in FIG. 41 and step S538 of the special extra special state process shown in FIG.

  First, the production control means 30 determines whether or not one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won in the internal lottery (S501). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (YES), the effect control means 30 produces an award winning effect that informs the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B. The apparatus 80 is executed (S502).

  If it is determined that none of the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 has been won after the process of step S502 or in the process of step S501 (NO), the effect control means 30 displays the counter storage means 43. It is determined whether or not the stored value of the specialization state counter added to is 0 (S503). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in a series of additional special states by determining whether or not the additional special state counter is 0. If it is determined that the stored value of the extra special state counter is 0 (YES), 5 is set in the extra special state counter (S504).

  After performing the process of step S504 or in the process of step S503, if it is determined that the stored value of the added special state counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 is stored in the flag storage area 42. It is determined whether the added specialization state addition flag is ON (S505). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the additional special state addition flag is ON, thereby adding the number of medals to be paid out in the AT state regardless of the stored value of the additional special state counter. It is determined whether or not to execute the process according to the above.

  If it is determined in step S505 that the additional special state addition flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether the stored value of the additional special state counter is 1 or not. (S506). In this process, the effect control means 30 performs the process related to the transition of the effect state executed when the remaining number of games of the game executed in the added special state is 1, and the AT executed otherwise. It is determined whether or not the stored value of the added special state counter is 1 in order to determine which process to be executed is the process related to the addition of adding the number of medals to be paid out in the state.

  If it is determined in step S505 that the additional special state addition flag is ON (YES) or if it is determined in step S506 that the stored value of the additional special state counter is not 1 (NO) ), The effect control means 30 executes the AT number specialization lottery, and adds the lottery result to the AT number addition counter (S507). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines the additional number by the AT number addition special lottery, and adds the additional number determined the lottery result to the AT number addition counter. Here, the expected value of the additional number determined by the AT number additional special lottery is higher than the additional number determined in the AT number additional lottery executed in step S475 of the normal additional state process (see FIG. 45). It is configured as follows.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the added special state addition flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON (S508). In this process, if it is determined that the additional special state addition flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 turns off the additional special state addition flag (S509), and ends the additional special state process. To do. On the other hand, in the process of step S508, when it is determined that the additional special state addition flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 subtracts 1 from the additional special state counter (S510). As described above, when the additional special state addition flag is ON, the effect control unit 30 adds the special state without adding the special state counter that counts the number of games in which the additional special state continues. The process is configured to end.

  After performing the process of step S510, the effect control means 30 performs an extra special state addition lottery (S511). In this process, the effect control means 30 executes an additional specialized state additional lottery with different winning probabilities depending on the winning combination in the internal lottery or the display combination set in the first display combination storing area 44a. Here, the extra special state addition lottery is configured such that the winning probability is high when the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a.

  Next, the production control means 30 determines whether or not the extra special state additional lottery is won (S512). In this process, when it is determined that the additional special state additional lottery is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the additional special state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra special state addition lottery has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 turns on the extra special state addition flag (S513) and ends the extra special state process. In this way, the production control means 30 turns on the additional special state addition flag when the extra special state additional lottery is won, and does not change the additional special state counter in the next game, and adds the special number of ATs. The lottery is executed, and the AT number addition counter can be added to the additional number.

  If it is determined in the process of step S506 that the stored value of the added special state counter is 1 (YES), the effect control means 30 subtracts 1 from the added special state counter (S514). Next, the effect control means 30 executes the specialization state continuous lottery (S515). In this process, the effect control means 30 adds the AT number special lottery every time the game is executed until the stored value of the extra special state counter becomes 1 and the extra special state addition flag is not set. Whether or not to re-execute a series of additional special states for executing the above is determined by adding special state continuous lottery.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the extra special state continuation lottery is won (S516). In this process, when it is determined that the extra special state continuation lottery is won (YES), the production control means 30 executes a special extra special lottery (S517). In this process, the production control means 30 determines whether or not to shift the production state to the special addition special state by special addition special lottery before executing the series of special addition states again. Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special added special state has been won (S518). In this process, when it is determined that the special added special state has not been won (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the special special state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special added special state has been won (YES), the production control means 30 sets the special added special flag to ON (S519), and ends the additional special state process. In this way, the production control means 30 maintains a state where the additional specialization flag is set, regardless of the result of the special specialization transition lottery, when winning the additional special state continuous lottery. The specialization state can be executed again. In addition, the production control means 30 maintains the state where the additional special flag is set, so that when the special additional special state is won, it immediately shifts to the additional special state after the game in the special additional special state ends. can do.

  In the process of step S516, when it is determined that the additional special state continuous lottery is not won (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special AT start flag is ON (S520). . In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special AT start flag is ON, so that the third pseudo game display combination is displayed three or more times in the special CZ state process (see FIG. 40). Or, based on the fact that the sum of the special CZ winning counter and the special CZ internal winning counter is 4 or more, it is determined whether or not the extra special state processing is executed, and it is determined that the special AT start flag is ON. In this case (YES), the special AT start flag is turned OFF (S521). After determining that the special AT start flag is OFF after executing the process of step S521 or in the process of step S520 (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the normal AT state process (FIG. 43) in the next game. , Refer to FIG. 44), the specialization state flag is turned off (S522), and the specialization state process is terminated.

<Special special processing with extra addition>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the special addition special state process executed in step S414 of the AT state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not a special effect is set in the reel effect storage area 45 (S531). In the present embodiment, the production control means 30 executes a process related to the determination of the number of added sheets as each process in the special added special state in accordance with the execution of the special added special reel control process (see FIG. 29). Since it is configured, in the process of step S531, it is determined whether or not the special extra special effect is set in the reel production storage area 45, and the special special reel control process is executed. Determine whether or not.

  In the process of step S531, when it is determined that the special addition special effect is not set (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the replay is won by the internal lottery (S532). In this process, when it is determined that the replay is not won (NO), the production control means 30 ends the special addition special state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replay is won (YES), the effect control means 30 notifies the striking order of the special addition special replay set in the striking order setting process executed in step S26 of the internal lottery process. Is executed (S533), and the special addition special state process is terminated. The slot machine 1 causes the player to press the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 in the hitting order of the special addition special replay by notifying the game control means 27 by informing the player of the special addition special replay hitting order at the time of winning the replay. By executing the processing of step S225 and step S226 of the main effect state transition processing (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the special effect is added to the reel effect storage area 45 and the reel control means 24 is set in the next game. It is possible to execute special reel control processing with special addition.

  In the process of step S531, when it is determined that the special addition special effect is set (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not a special special signal is received (S534). In this process, the effect control means 30 receives the special addition special signal transmitted from the reel control means 24 when the reel control means 24 executes the special addition special reel effect processing (see step S172 in FIG. 29). If it is determined whether or not a special addition special signal has been received (YES), the AT number special addition special lottery is executed, and the lottery result is added to the AT number addition counter (S535). The process returns to step S534. In this process, the effect control means 30 determines the extra number by the AT number special addition lottery, and adds the additional number determined the lottery result to the AT number addition counter. Here, the expected value of the additional number determined by the AT number special addition lottery is the additional number determined in the AT number additional special lottery executed in step S507 of the additional special state process (see FIG. 47). It is comprised so that it may become higher.

  If it is determined in step S534 that the special addition special signal has not been received (NO), the effect control means 30 performs a step when the reel control means 24 ends the special specialization reel control process. It is determined whether or not the special addition special end signal transmitted in the process of S179 has been received (S536). In this process, when it is determined that the special addition special end signal has not been received (NO), the effect control means 30 returns the process to step S534. In this way, the production control means 30 continues the special addition special state process until the reel control means 24 finishes the special specialization reel control process, and in the special specialization reel control process, the max bet button MB is When the special operation of special addition reel effect is executed after the second press operation, the AT number special addition lottery is executed every time of the special addition special reel effect.

  In the process of step S536, when it is determined that the special addition special end signal has been received (YES), the production control means 30 turns off the special addition special flag (S537), and executes the special addition state process. Then (S538), the special addition special state process is terminated. In this way, the effect control means 30 executes the extra special state process at the end of the special extra special state process, so that various processes in the extra special state from the game in which the special extra special effect is executed as the reel production. Can be executed.

<Pseudo bonus state processing>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus state process executed in step S412 of the AT state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won in the internal lottery (S541). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (YES), the effect control means 30 produces an award winning effect that informs the batting order for winning the bell A and the bell B. The apparatus 80 is executed (S542).

  If it is determined that none of the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 is won after the process of step S542 or in the process of step S541 (NO), the effect control means 30 displays the special pseudo bonus flag. It is determined whether or not is ON (S543). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the effect state to be executed is the normal pseudo bonus state or the special pseudo bonus state by determining whether or not the special pseudo bonus flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S543 that the special pseudo bonus state flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 has the pseudo bonus state selected flag stored in the flag storage area 42 ON. It is determined whether or not (S544). In this process, the effect control means 30 is a pseudo bonus state selected flag that is set when the player selects which of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state to execute the normal pseudo bonus state. Is determined to be ON, and it is determined whether or not the player has selected the normal pseudo bonus state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S544 that the pseudo bonus state selected flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a normal pseudo bonus state automatic selection process (S545). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines that the game has progressed in a state where the player has not selected which of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state to execute. First, it is determined by lottery which of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state to shift to the normal pseudo bonus state. Next, the effect control means 30 turns on the flag corresponding to the pseudo bonus state determined to shift by lottery, and determines which of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state to shift to the normal pseudo bonus state. Therefore, the pseudo bonus state selected flag is turned ON. The effect control means 30 may be configured to shift to a preset normal pseudo bonus state among the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state in the process of step S545.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 subtracts the AT number counter at the time of winning the bell A and the bell B when the effect state is the pseudo bonus state in the AT state winning process (see FIG. 55) described later. It is configured not to. By performing the process of step S545, the effect control means 30 can continue to play the game without selecting the normal pseudo bonus state, and can prevent an unreasonable increase in the chances of winning the bells A and B.

  After performing the process of step S545 or in the process of step S544, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus state selected flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 is stored in the flag storage area 42. It is determined whether or not the first pseudo bonus flag is ON (S546). If it is determined in step S543 that the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES) or if it is determined in step S546 that the first pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the first pseudo bonus state process (S547) and ends the pseudo bonus state process. In this process, the effect control means 30 executes a pseudo bonus extra process for notifying by the first pseudo bonus effect that the pseudo bonus extra process may be executed as the first pseudo bonus state.

  If it is determined in step S546 that the first pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control unit 30 determines whether the second pseudo bonus flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON. It is determined whether or not (S548). If it is determined in the process of step S548 that the second pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the second pseudo bonus state process (S549), and ends the pseudo bonus state process. To do. In this process, the effect control means 30 ends when the game of a preset number of games (for example, 30 games) is executed as the second pseudo bonus state, and when the transition to the normal AT state occurs, A value to be added is determined based on the storage value of the addition coefficient counter of the storage means 43 and the storage value of the addition magnification counter of the counter storage means 43, and the storage value of the addition coefficient counter and the storage value of the addition magnification counter are respectively determined. A pseudo bonus addition process to be added according to the winning combination or display combination is executed.

  If it is determined in step S548 that the second pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that the third pseudo bonus flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is ON. The third pseudo bonus state process is executed (S550), and the pseudo bonus state process is terminated. In this process, the effect control means 30 executes a pseudo bonus extra process for notifying the execution of the pseudo bonus extra process by the third pseudo bonus effect as the third pseudo bonus state.

<First pseudo bonus state process>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the first pseudo bonus state process executed in step S547 of the pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter in the counter storage means 43 is 0 (S551). In this processing, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the first pseudo bonus state or the special pseudo bonus state by determining whether or not the pseudo bonus state counter is 0. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in the process of step S551 that the stored value of the pseudo bonus state counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (S552). . In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether the special pseudo bonus flag is ON, thereby executing either the initial setting of the special pseudo bonus state or the initial setting of the first pseudo bonus state. To decide.

  In the process of step S552, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 sets 10 to the extra coefficient counter as the initial setting of the special pseudo bonus state (S553). Then, 10 is set in the additional magnification counter (S554), and 40 is set in the pseudo bonus counter (S555). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 sets 50 in the pseudo bonus counter as the initial setting of the first pseudo bonus state (S556).

  After performing the processing of step S555 and step S556, or in the processing of step S551, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the first pseudo bonus effect lottery. Is executed (S557). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not to execute the first pseudo bonus effect informing that there is a possibility of adding a value to the AT number addition counter.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the first pseudo bonus effect lottery is won (S558). In this process, when it is determined that the first pseudo bonus effect lottery is won (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the first pseudo bonus effect (S559), and executes the first pseudo bonus extra lottery. The lottery result is added to the AT number counter and added to the counter (S560). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines the additional number to be added to the AT number addition counter by the first pseudo bonus extra lottery. Here, the first pseudo bonus extra lottery is a lottery including a loss (0), and if it is lost, the process of step S560 is terminated without adding a value to the AT extra counter. That is, the effect control means 30 is configured to be able to end the process of step S560 without adding a value to the AT number addition counter even when the first pseudo bonus effect is executed. Here, the process of step S556 to step S560 constitutes a pseudo bonus addition process in the first pseudo bonus state in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined that the first pseudo bonus effect lottery is not won after the process of step S560 or in the process of step S558 (NO), the effect control means 30 has the special pseudo bonus flag ON. It is determined whether or not (S561). In this process, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the second pseudo bonus state process (S562) and ends the first pseudo bonus state process. . Thus, at the time of execution of the special pseudo bonus state, the effect control means 30 is configured to shift from the first pseudo bonus state process to the second pseudo bonus state process.

  In the process of step S561, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that one game in the first pseudo bonus state has been executed, and the pseudo bonus counter 1 is subtracted (S563). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (S564). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the first pseudo bonus state process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the first pseudo bonus state for the preset number of games, and the normal AT is started from the next game. In order to execute a game based on the state process, the pseudo bonus flag is turned off (S565), the pseudo bonus selected flag is turned off (S566), and the first pseudo bonus flag is turned off (S567), so that the first Various flags relating to the pseudo bonus state are initialized, and the first pseudo bonus state process is ended.

<Second pseudo bonus state process>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the second pseudo bonus state process executed in step S549 of the pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG. 49 and step S562 of the first pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (S571). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the second simulated bonus state by determining whether or not the pseudo bonus state counter is 0, If it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (YES), as an initial setting of the second pseudo bonus state, 10 is set in the additional coefficient counter (S572), and 5 is set in the additional magnification counter. (S573), 30 is set in the pseudo bonus counter (S574).

  After performing the process of step S574 or in the process of step S571, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell by internal lottery It is determined whether or not 8 is won (S575). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is won (YES), the effect control means 30 adds 1 to the bell winning number counter in the counter storage means 43 (S576). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the bell winning number counter is 5 (S577). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the bell winning number counter is 5 (YES), the effect control means 30 adds 1 to the extra coefficient counter (S578) and clears the bell winning number counter (S578). S579). As described above, the effect control means 30 adds the addition coefficient counter when the number of times of winning in the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 is 5 at the time of execution of the second pseudo bonus state. It is configured.

  In the process of step S575, when it is determined that none of the batting order bell 1 to batting order bell 8 is won (NO), the effect control means 30 sets the display combination in the first display combination storing area 44a. It is determined whether or not (S580). In this process, when it is determined that the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a (YES), the effect control means 30 adds 1 to the extra magnification counter (S581). As described above, the effect control means 30 adds the extra magnification when the display combination is set in the first display combination storage area 44a when the second pseudo bonus state is executed, that is, when the second pseudo game is executed. The counter is configured to add.

  After executing the processing of step S579 and step S581, if it is determined in step S577 that the stored value of the bell winning number counter is not 5 (NO) or in step S580, the first display combination storing area 44a If it is determined that no display combination is set (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (S582). In this process, if it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the third pseudo bonus state process (S583), and ends the second pseudo bonus state process. . Thus, at the time of execution of the special pseudo bonus state, the effect control means 30 shifts from the first pseudo bonus state process to the second pseudo bonus state process, and from the second pseudo bonus state process to the third pseudo bonus state process. Configured to migrate.

  In the process of step S582, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that the game in one second pseudo bonus state has been executed, and the pseudo bonus counter 1 is subtracted (S584). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (S585). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the second pseudo bonus state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 calculates and calculates based on the stored value of the additional coefficient counter and the stored value of the additional magnification counter. The result is added to the AT number addition counter (S586). In this processing, the effect control means 30 multiplies the stored value of the additional coefficient counter by the stored value of the additional magnification counter, and adds the multiplied result to the AT number additional counter as the additional number. Here, the process of step S586 constitutes a pseudo bonus addition process in the second pseudo bonus state in the present embodiment.

  Next, the effect control means 30 executes the second pseudo bonus state for the preset number of games, and turns off the pseudo bonus flag in order to execute the game based on the normal AT state processing from the next game (S587). ) By turning off the pseudo bonus selected flag (S588) and turning off the second pseudo bonus flag (S589), various flags relating to the second pseudo bonus state are initialized, and counter initialization processing is executed. In (S590), an additional coefficient counter, an additional magnification counter, and a bell winning number counter, which are various counters related to the second pseudo bonus state, are cleared, and the second pseudo bonus state process is ended.

<Third pseudo bonus state process>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the third pseudo bonus state process executed in step S550 of the pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG. 49 and step S583 of the second pseudo bonus state process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (S591). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the third pseudo bonus state by determining whether or not the pseudo bonus state counter is 0, If it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus state counter is 0 (YES), 20 is set in the pseudo bonus counter as the initial setting of the third pseudo bonus state (S592).

  After performing the process of step S592 or in the process of step S591, if it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 executes the third pseudo bonus extra lottery. (S593). In this process, the effect control means 30 executes a third pseudo bonus extra lottery that draws whether or not to add a value to the AT number extra counter.

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the third pseudo bonus extra lottery is won (S594). In this process, if it is determined that the third pseudo bonus extra lottery has been won (YES), the effect control means 30 executes an extra lottery winner announcement effect for notifying that the additional number is added to the AT extra counter. Then, the lottery result of the third pseudo bonus extra lottery is added to the AT number extra counter (S596). Here, the processing in steps S593 to S596 constitutes the pseudo bonus addition processing in the third pseudo bonus state in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined that the third pseudo bonus extra lottery has not been won after the process of step S596 or in step S594, that is, it is determined not to add a value to the AT extra counter (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that one game in the third pseudo bonus state or one special pseudo bonus state has been executed, and subtracts one from the pseudo bonus counter (S597). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (S598). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the third pseudo bonus state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the pseudo bonus counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (S599). In this process, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 calculates and calculates based on the stored value of the additional coefficient counter and the stored value of the additional magnification counter. A pseudo bonus addition process in the second pseudo bonus state in which the result is added to the AT number addition counter is executed (S600).

  Next, the effect control means 30 determines that a special pseudo bonus state of a preset number of games has been executed, turns off the special pseudo bonus flag (S601), and executes counter initialization processing (S602). The additional coefficient counter, the additional magnification counter, and the bell winning number counter, which are various counters related to the second pseudo bonus state, are cleared.

  If it is determined in the process of step S599 that the special pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 has executed the third pseudo bonus state for the preset number of games. By turning off the selected flag (S603) and turning off the third pseudo bonus flag (S604), various flags relating to the third pseudo bonus state are initialized. Then, after executing the process of step S602 or step S604, the effect control means 30 turns off the pseudo bonus flag to execute a game based on the normal AT state process from the next game (S605), and the third pseudo End the bonus state process.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the first pseudo bonus state process (see FIG. 50) by turning on the special pseudo bonus flag when the production state shifts to the special pseudo bonus state. A plurality of normal pseudo bonus state processes of the second pseudo bonus state process (see FIG. 51) and the third pseudo bonus state process (see FIG. 52) are executed in one game, and the first pseudo bonus state to the second pseudo bonus state process are executed. A plurality of pseudo bonus addition processes executed in each of the three pseudo bonus states can be executed in one game.

  With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of pseudo bonus states as the production state, and the special pseudo transition that is performed when the transition to the special pseudo bonus state among the plurality of pseudo bonus states is won. By configuring the pseudo bonus extra process executed in the bonus state from the pseudo bonus extra process set for each of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus extra process for the special pseudo bonus state is performed. Without providing separately, it can be configured as a pseudo bonus state different from the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state, and various games can be realized without increasing the data amount.

<Process when receiving a winning command>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the process for receiving a winning command executed in step S264 of the process for receiving a command shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the effect state set in the effect state storage area 48 is the normal effect state (S611). In this process, when it is determined that the normal performance state is set (YES), the performance control means 30 determines whether or not the batting order notification effect has been executed (S612). In this process, the effect control means 30 is executed in step S26 of the internal lottery in the winning auxiliary effect for notifying the batting order in which the bell A and the bell B are won when the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8 are won and the replay is won. It is determined whether one of the batting order of the transition replay set in the batting order setting process and the batting order notification effect for notifying the batting order of the special additional special replay is executed.

  In the process of step S612, when it is determined that the winning assist effect or batting order notification effect is executed (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the winning command reception process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning assistance effect or batting order notification effect is not executed (NO), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the first stop operation is the stop button B1 (S613). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the first stop operation detected by the stop switch 74 is a first stop operation detected by pressing the stop button B1 by the player. .

  In the process of step S613, when it is determined that the first stop operation is the stop button B1 (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the process when receiving the winning command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first stop operation is other than the stop button B1 (NO), the effect control means 30 executes a penalty generation process (S614), and ends the winning command reception process. In this process, the effect control means 30 executes a process for turning on the penalty flag to generate a penalty state, a process for determining the number of games in which the penalty state continues, and the like.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the effect state set in the effect state storage area 48 is not the normal effect state (NO), the effect control means 30 is set in the effect state storage area 48. It is determined whether or not the performance state is the CZ state (S615). In this process, when it is determined that the CZ state is set (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special CZ state flag is ON (S616). In this process, when it is determined that the special CZ state flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the process upon receiving a winning command.

  If it is determined in step S616 that the special CZ state flag is OFF (NO), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the CZ state selected flag is ON (S617). In this process, if it is determined that the CZ state selected flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 executes the normal CZ state in the next game and any of the first CZ state to the third CZ state. The selection operation acceptance flag stored in the flag storage area 42 is turned ON (S618), and the player is in any one of the first CZ state to the third CZ state. The effect device 80 is caused to execute the CZ state selection notification effect instructing to select (S619), and the winning command receiving process is terminated.

  In the process of step S617, when it is determined that the CZ state selected flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the pressing operation acceptance flag is ON (S620). In this process, when it is determined that the pressing operation acceptance flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the process for receiving the winning command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the push operation acceptance flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines that the game has progressed in the third CZ state while the detection state continues, and automatically continues. The lottery means 30b executes the third CZ state automatic execution process (S621), and the winning command reception process ends. In this process, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b executes an addition process of incrementing the effect accumulation counter by 1 every time the pressing continuation lottery means 30a executes the pressing operation continuation lottery and wins the pressing operation continuation lottery.

  If it is determined in step S615 that the effect state set in the effect state storage area 48 is not the CZ state (NO), the effect control means 30 sets the AT state in the effect state storage area 48. The AT state winning process is executed (S622), and the winning command receiving process is terminated. In this process, the effect control unit 30 executes a process for determining whether or not the AT end condition is satisfied, and a process for starting and ending the rare role high-probability state.

<Third CZ state automatic execution process>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the third CZ state automatic execution process executed in step S621 of the winning command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the automatic continuous lottery means 30b adds 1 to the effect accumulation counter (S631). Next, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b executes the push operation continuation lottery as the automatic continuation lottery and determines whether or not to continue the detection state (S632). Next, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b determines whether or not the pressing operation continuation lottery has been won (S633). In this process, if it is determined that the pressing operation continuation lottery is won, that is, the detection state is to be continued (YES), the process returns to step S631.

  In the process of step S633, when it is determined that the pressing operation continuation lottery is not won, that is, the detection state is not continued (NO), the automatic continuation lottery means 30b determines that the player has decided the determination button by ending the detection state. In order to prevent the effect accumulation counter from being added when the JGB is pressed, the pressing operation acceptance flag is turned OFF (S634). Next, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b turns on the push operation end flag to cause the effect control means 30 to perform AT transition lottery based on the stored value of the effect accumulation counter in the third CZ state process at the next game execution. In step S635, the third CZ state automatic execution process is terminated.

  As described above, the automatic continuous lottery means 30b executes the pressing operation continuous lottery every time the effect accumulation counter is incremented by 1, and performs the processing of steps S631 to S633 until it is determined that the detection state is not continued in the pressing operation continuous lottery. repeat. Then, when the automatic continuation lottery means 30b determines that the detection state is not to be continued in the pressing operation continuation lottery, the effect control means 30 sets the effect accumulation counter in step S344 of the third CZ state process at the next game execution. An AT shift lottery is executed based on the stored value. With this configuration, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the game progresses in a state where the detection condition is satisfied, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b executes the automatic continuation lottery, and the detection state is detected in the automatic continuation lottery. The cumulative number of times that the detection state is determined to be continued until it is determined not to continue is added to the stored value of the effect accumulation counter in the counter storage means 43, and the effect control means 30 performs AT transition lottery based on the stored value of the effect accumulation counter. For the player who has played the game in a state where the detection condition is satisfied, the expectation for the subsequent effect can be changed by the stored value of the effect accumulation counter. Interest can be improved.

<Processing when winning AT status>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the AT state winning process performed in step S622 of the winning command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (S651). In this process, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special pseudo bonus flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus flag is ON (S652). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus flag is ON (YES), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus state selected flag is ON (S653).

  If it is determined in the process of step S653 that the pseudo bonus state selected flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus state selected flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that the effect state has shifted to the normal pseudo bonus state in the current game, and jog dials the player. In order to select one of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state by operating JG, the selection operation acceptance flag for validating the input command output when operating the jog dial JG is turned ON (S654), The effect device 80 is caused to execute a pseudo bonus state selection notification effect informing the player to select any one of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state (S655), and the AT state winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S652 that the pseudo bonus state flag is OFF (NO), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the specialization flag is ON (S656). In this process, if it is determined that the specialization flag for addition is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional specialization flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the normal additional flag is ON (S657). In this process, when it is determined that the normal addition flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process.

  In the process of step S657, when it is determined that the normal addition flag is OFF (NO), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the bell A or the bell B has won (S658). In this process, when it is determined that the bell A or the bell B has won (YES), the effect control means 30 determines that the winning combination with the specified payout number greater than the specified inserted number has been won, and the AT 5 is subtracted from the stored value of the sheet counter, which is a value obtained by subtracting the specified inserted sheet number from the paid-out sheet number (S659). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the AT number counter is 0 (S660). In this process, if it is determined that the stored value of the AT number counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 executes the AT state end process (S661) and ends the AT state winning process. . In this process, the effect control means 30 performs a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the AT state again, or the AT state set in the effect state storage area 48 when it is determined not to execute the AT state again. By clearing and setting the normal performance state, a process of shifting to the normal performance state is executed.

  By the process of step S651 to step S657, the production control means 30 is in the production state other than the normal AT state in the AT state, and when the bell A and the bell B win the prize in the batting order bell 1 to the batting order bell 8. The AT number counter is not subtracted. With this configuration, when the effect control means 30 shifts to an effect state where there is a possibility that the AT number addition counter is added during the AT state, the AT end condition is satisfied during execution of the game in the effect state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being finished before the game is executed for the preset number of times, and to prevent the player from being dissatisfied. The production control means 30 is configured not to subtract the rare combination fluctuation counter when the production state is other than the normal AT state among the AT states by the processing of steps S651 to S657. It may be configured to subtract a counter.

  In the process of step S658, when it is determined that the bell A and the bell B have not won (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high probability state start flag is ON (S662). . In this process, when it is determined that the rare role high probability state start flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 is set in the batting order setting process executed in step S26 of the internal lottery process when the replay is won. It is determined whether or not the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the hit order of the high-accuracy transition replay (S663). In this process, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the hit order of the high-accuracy transition replay (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the hit order of the high-accuracy transition replay (YES), the effect control means 30 causes the reel effect determination means 29 to perform the second pseudo game display combination lottery. It is determined that preparation for referring to the display combination lottery table E is complete, and the rare combination high-probability state start flag is set to ON (S664). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the finite rare role high-accuracy flag is ON (S665). In this process, if it is determined that the finite rare role high-accuracy flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 performs the high-accuracy transition replay batting order notification effect in the normal addition state end process (see FIG. 46). It is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the hit order of the high-accuracy transition replay based on the execution of the process, and the AT state winning process is terminated without executing the process of step S666. On the other hand, when it is determined that the finite rare role high-accuracy flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 performs the high-accuracy transition based on the execution of the batting order notification effect of the high-accuracy transition replay in the normal AT state. It is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed in the replay order, the rare role high probability state game number lottery is executed to determine the number of games in which the rare role high probability state continues, and the lottery result is rare The value is set in the hand fluctuation counter (S666), and the AT state winning process is terminated.

  In the process of step S662, when it is determined that the rare role high probability state start flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the rare role high probability end flag is ON ( S667). In this process, when it is determined that the rare role high probability end flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether the finite rare role high accuracy end flag is ON (S668). If it is determined in step S667 that the rare role high probability end flag is ON (YES) or if it is determined in step S668 that the finite rare role high probability end flag is ON (YES), The control means 30 executes the rare role in the process at the time when the game of the number of games in which the rare role high probability state continues in the rare role high probability state where the rare role high probability state continues is limited or in the normal addition state end process. It is determined that it is determined to end the high-accuracy state, and the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are pressed by the high-accuracy end replay batting order set in the batting order setting process executed in step S26 of the internal lottery process when the replay is won. It is determined whether it has been done (S669). In this process, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 are not pressed in the hit order of the high-precision end replay (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 have been pressed in the order of hitting the high-accuracy end replay (YES), the effect control means 30 causes the reel effect determination means 29 to be in the second pseudo game display combination lottery. It is determined that the display combination lottery table D is ready to be prepared, and a rare combination high-precision initialization process is executed (S670), thereby initializing various flags related to the rare combination high-precision state, and performing an AT state winning process. finish.

  In the process of step S668, when it is determined that the finite rare role high certainty end flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the rare role variation counter is 1 ( S671). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the rare role variation counter is 1 (YES), the production control means 30 is in the rare role high probability state where the number of games in which the rare role high probability state continues is finite. It is determined that the last game has been executed, and the finite rare role high probability end flag is set to ON (S672).

  After executing the process of step S672, if it is determined that the stored value of the AT number counter is not 0 in the process of step S660 (NO) or the stored value of the rare role variation counter is not 1 in the process of step S671. (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the stored value of the rare role variation counter is 0 (S673). In this process, when it is determined that the stored value of the rare combination variation counter is 0 (YES), the effect control means 30 ends the AT state winning process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored value of the rare combination variation counter is not 0 (NO), the effect control means 30 decrements the rare combination variation counter by 1 (S674) and ends the AT state winning process.

<Process when receiving input command>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the input command reception process executed in step S266 of the command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the jog dial JG has been operated by the player (S681). In this process, when it is determined that the jog dial JG is not operated by the player (NO), the effect control means 30 ends the input command reception process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jog dial JG has been operated by the player (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the selection operation acceptance flag is ON (S682).

  In the process of step S682, when it is determined that the selection operation acceptance flag is ON (YES), the effect control unit 30 determines whether or not the effect state is the CZ state (S683). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether the effect state is the CZ state, so that the effect state is the CZ state, and causes the player to select one of the first CZ state to the third CZ state. For this reason, the selection operation acceptance flag is set or the production state is the AT state, and the selection operation acceptance flag is set to cause the player to select one of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state. It is determined whether any of the above.

  In the process of step S683, when it is determined that the effect state is the CZ state (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the dial portion JGD has been rotated by the player (S684). In this process, the effect control means 30 is that the received input command is the input command based on the dial rotation signal output from the dial unit 75 when the dial unit JGD is rotated, and the decision button JGB is pressed. In this case, it is determined whether the input command is based on a determination signal output from the determination switch 76.

  In the process of step S684, when it is determined that the dial portion JGD has been rotated by the player (YES), the effect control unit 30 rotates the rotation direction and the rotation amount (angle) of the dial portion JGD included in the dial rotation signal. Based on this information, it is selected which of the first CZ state flag to the third CZ state flag to set the normal CZ state flag (S685), which is the normal CZ state flag that is currently selected for setting. A notification effect for informing the user is executed (S686), and the process at the time of receiving the input command is terminated.

  In the process of step S684, when it is determined that the dial part JGD has not been rotated by the player (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that the enter button JGB has been pressed, and in the process of step S685. The selected normal CZ state flag is turned ON (S687). Here, the effect control means 30 is configured to turn on the first CZ state flag when the pressing operation of the determination button JGB is detected in a state where the dial portion JGD has never been rotated. Next, the effect control means 30 determines that the selection operation for the normal CZ state by the player has ended, sets the selection operation acceptance flag to OFF (S688), sets the CZ state selected flag to ON (S689), and enters the input command. The process at the time of reception ends.

  In the process of step S683, when it is determined that the effect state is not the CZ state (NO), the effect control means 30 is in the AT state, and any of the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state is present. It is determined that the selection operation acceptance flag has been set to allow the player to select whether or not the dial portion JGD has been rotated by the player (S690). In this process, the effect control means 30 is that the received input command is the input command based on the dial rotation signal output from the dial unit 75 when the dial unit JGD is rotated, and the decision button JGB is pressed. In this case, it is determined whether the input command is based on a determination signal output from the determination switch 76.

  In the process of step S690, when it is determined that the dial portion JGD has been rotated by the player (YES), the effect control means 30 causes the rotation direction and the rotation amount (angle) of the dial portion JGD included in the dial rotation signal. Is selected from among the first pseudo bonus state flag to the third pseudo bonus state flag to be set (S691), and the normal pseudo bonus currently selected for setting is selected. A notification effect for notifying which state flag is present is executed (S692), and the input command reception process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S690 that the dial portion JGD has not been rotated by the player (NO), the effect control means 30 determines that the enter button JGB has been pressed, and in step S691. The selected normal pseudo bonus state flag is turned ON (S693). Here, the effect control means 30 is configured to turn on the first pseudo bonus state flag when the pressing operation of the determination button JGB is detected in a state where the dial portion JGD has never been rotated. Next, the effect control means 30 determines that the selection operation for the normal pseudo bonus state by the player has ended, sets the selection operation acceptance flag to OFF (S694), sets the pseudo bonus state selected flag to ON (S695), Ends input command reception processing.

  In the process of step S682, when it is determined that the selection operation acceptance flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the pressing operation acceptance flag is ON (S696). In this process, when it is determined that the push operation acceptance flag is OFF (NO), the effect control means 30 validates the input command transmitted from the operation acceptance means 28 by the operation of the jog dial JG by the player. It is determined that it is not necessary, and the input command reception process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S696 that the pressing operation acceptance flag is ON (YES), the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the determination button JGB has been pressed by the player (S697). In this process, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the received input command is an input command based on the effect signal output from the determination switch 76 when the determination button JGB is pressed. When it is determined that the JGB is not pressed (NO), the effect control unit 30 ends the input command reception process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button JGB has been pressed (YES), the effect control means 30 adds 1 to the effect accumulation counter (S698). Next, the effect control means 30 causes the pressing continuation lottery means 30a to execute the pressing operation continuation lottery and determines whether or not to continue the detection state (S699). Next, the effect control means 30 determines whether or not the pressing operation continuing lottery by the pressing and continuing lottery means 30a has been won (S700). In this process, when it is determined that the pressing operation continuation lottery is won, that is, the detection state is to be continued (YES), the input command reception process is terminated.

  In the process of step S700, when the push operation continuation lottery is not won, that is, when it is determined not to continue the detection state (NO), the effect control means 30 is based on the determination that the detection state is not continued. The push operation acceptance flag is turned off (S701), the push operation end flag is turned off (S702), and the input command reception process is terminated.

  In this way, the effect control unit 30 accumulates the effect each time the determination button JGB is pressed by the player and the determination switch 76 detects the pressing operation when the pressing operation acceptance flag is set, that is, in the detection state. When the counter is incremented by 1 and the effect accumulation counter is added, the push button continuation lottery means 30a executes the push operation continuation lottery, and the decision button JGB is depressed until it is determined that the detection state is not continued in the push operation continuation lottery. Each time the determination switch 76 detects a pressing operation, the processing of step S698 and step S699 is executed. Then, when it is determined that the detection state is not to be continued in the push operation continuation lottery, the effect control means 30 performs AT based on the stored value of the effect accumulation counter in the third CZ state process (see FIG. 39) executed in the next game. Perform a transfer lottery. With this configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is based on the cumulative value of the number of times the determination switch 76 detects the pressing operation when the production state shifts from the normal production state to the CZ state and the third CZ state is selected. The winning probabilities in the AT transition lottery are different, and the player's expectation for the subsequent effects can be changed by the number of pressing operations detected by the determination switch 76, and the player's expectation can be changed. Can improve interest in

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one of the predetermined cancellation conditions is satisfied after the pseudo control is executed by the reel control means 24 until the pseudo game is executed. In addition to canceling the determined pseudo game, the display combination re-lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the pseudo game. The virtual game is canceled once when a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, and it is determined again whether or not the reel control means 24 is to be executed by the re-lottery process. It can prevent impairing the interest of a person's game.

4). Modification In this embodiment, when the second reel stop control is executed, the reel control unit 24 presses the stop button pressed before the one reel corresponding to the pressed stop button temporarily stops. The temporary stop signal detected by the stop switch 74 when a stop button other than the stop button is pressed is activated, and the temporary stop of the other reel that is different from the one reel by the stop switch 74 is temporarily stopped. When an operation is detected, the other reel can be temporarily stopped before one reel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one reel corresponding to the pressed stop button When the stop button other than the pressed stop button is pressed before the temporary stop, the stop switch 74 detects The temporary stop signal may be validated, and the reels may be temporarily stopped according to the order of the pressed stop buttons, that is, one reel may be temporarily stopped and then the other reel may be temporarily stopped.

  FIGS. 57 and 58 show the temporary switch detected by the stop switch 74 when a stop button other than the pressed stop button is pressed before the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is temporarily stopped. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop process at the time of comprising so that each stop may be temporarily stopped according to the order of the stop button pressed down while validating a stop signal. In addition, in the process of step S131-step S140, since the reel control means 24 performs the process similar to the reel stop process shown in FIG. 20, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After executing the process of step S140, the reel control means 24 stores the reel stop position corresponding to the pressed stop button determined in the process of step S140, that is, the reel stop number (S721). In this process, the reel control unit 24 stores the reel stop position storage area of the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button among the reel stop position storage areas (not shown) provided for each reel in the storage unit 40. The reel stop number determined in step S140 is set.

  Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the reel storing the reel stop position is other than the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button (S722). In this process, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the reel stop number is set in a reel stop position storage area different from the reel stop position storage area in which the reel stop number is set in the process of step S721.

  If it is determined in step S722 that there is no reel that stores the reel stop position other than the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button (NO), the reel control unit 24 stops the reel. A position setting process is executed (S723). In this process, the reel control means 24 is configured to stop or temporarily stop the reel when the reel rotates from the time when the process of step S723 is started to the position of the reel stop number stored in step S721. Execute the setting process.

  If it is determined in step S722 that there is another reel corresponding to the pressed stop button (YES), the reel control means 24 has a plurality of other reels storing the reel stop position. It is determined whether or not there is (S724). In this process, when it is determined that there is one other reel in which the reel stop position is stored (NO), the reel control unit 24 stores the reel stop position storage area in which the current reel stop position is stored. The second reel stop position storage area is set (S725). On the other hand, if it is determined that there are a plurality of other reels in which the reel stop position is stored (YES), the reel control unit 24 stops the third reel stop in the reel stop position storage area in which the current reel stop position is stored. The position storage area is set (S726).

  After executing the processing of step S723, step S725, or step S726, the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the reel for which the reel stop position is set has been stopped or temporarily stopped (S727). In this process, when it is determined that the reel set with the reel stop position is not stopped or temporarily stopped (NO), the reel control means 24 determines whether or not the slip frame number limit flag is ON. (S728). In this process, when it is determined that the sliding frame number limit flag is ON (YES), the reel control unit 24 returns to the process of step S727 until it is determined that the sliding frame limit flag is stopped.

  If it is determined in step S727 that the reel set with the reel stop position is stopped or temporarily stopped (YES), the reel control unit 24 stores the reel stop position corresponding to the reel set with the reel stop position. The reel stop position stored in the area is erased (S729). Next, the reel control means 24 executes a reel stop position storage area update process (S730). In this processing, the reel control means 24 sets the reel stop position storage area set in the second reel stop position storage area as the first reel stop position storage area, and is set as the third reel stop position storage area. The existing reel stop position storage area is set as the second reel stop position storage area. In this process, if there is no reel stop position storage area set in the second reel stop position storage area or the third reel stop position storage area, the reel control means 24 executes the reel stop position storage area update process. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to step S731.

  Next, the reel control means 24 determines whether there is a reel in which the reel stop position is stored (S731). In this process, if it is determined that the reel stop position is stored in the reel in which the reel stop position is stored, that is, the first reel stop position storage area (YES), the reel control means 24 performs the first reel The reel stop position stored in the stop position storage area is set (S732). In this process, the reel control means 24 is configured to stop or temporarily stop the reel when the reel rotates from the time when the process of step S732 is started to the position of the reel stop number stored in step S721. Set.

  By executing the adjustment processing shown in steps S721 to S727 and steps S720 to S732, the reel control unit 24 starts the reel temporary stop control for one reel and temporarily stops one reel. When the stop switch detects a temporary stop operation on the other reel and the temporary stop position of the other reel is closer than the temporary stop position of one reel, one reel temporarily stops before the other reel. Can do.

  After executing the process of step S732, if it is determined in the process of step S728 that the sliding frame number limit flag is OFF (NO) or there is no reel in which the reel stop position is stored in the process of step S731. If it is determined (NO), the reel control means 24 determines whether all the reels of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped (S733). In this process, when it is determined that all of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped (YES), the reel control means 24 ends the reel stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 is rotating (NO), the reel control means 24 determines whether or not all of the stop buttons B1 to B3 have been pressed. Is determined (S734). In this process, if it is determined that any one of the stop buttons B1 to B3 is not pressed (NO), the reel control unit 24 returns the process to step S131. On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the stop buttons B1 to B3 have been pressed (YES), the reel control unit 24 returns the process to step S733.

  When the stop switch 74 detects a temporary stop operation for any one of the plurality of reels by the processing of step S131 and step S734, the stop switch 74 starts the reel temporary stop control and Is configured to be able to detect a temporary stop operation on another different reel.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of this configuration detects the temporary stop operation for one reel, can detect the temporary stop operation for the other reel before one reel temporarily stops, If the temporary stop position is closer than the temporary stop position of one reel, the adjustment process of steps S721 to S727 and steps S729 to S732 of the reel stop process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) is executed to temporarily stop. By temporarily stopping the reels in the order in which the operations are detected, it is possible to reduce the time required for one pseudo game without giving the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to realize a rapid progress of the game.

  In this configuration, the adjustment process is configured to set the reel stop position in the order in which the reel stop position is stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel stop position is set for one reel. In this state, the reel stop position of the other reel is also set, and when the reel stop position of the other reel is closer to the effective line L1 than the reel stop position of one reel, the rotation speed of the other reel is slowed down. It may be configured. Even with this configuration, the reel control means 24 can temporarily stop each reel in the order in which the temporary stop operation is detected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel effect determining means 29 is used when the number of times of execution of the first pseudo game is less than the number of times of combo and the number of times of the main game executed until the latent state is ended is three times. The first pseudo game display combination lottery is executed, and the display combination determined by the first pseudo game display combination lottery is set in the eighth display combination storage area 44h. At the time of execution of combo lottery executed in the game won by the lottery in the pseudo game, it is configured to determine the number of combos and the display combination that is temporarily displayed on the active line L1 at the time of execution of each first pseudo game. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 displays the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 when the start switch 73 detects the start operation of the start lever SL related to the execution of the first pseudo game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel effect determination unit 29 sets a display combination in one of the display combination storage areas 44 and schedules execution of the first pseudo game. When a pseudo game is won, a freeze is immediately generated to delay this game and execute the predetermined pseudo game, and the start switch 73 detects the start operation of the start lever SL related to the execution of the predetermined pseudo game. Based on the above, the display combination set in the display combination storage area 44 may be shifted in the head direction. Further, the predetermined pseudo game may be a pseudo game that involves a plurality of temporary rotations and temporary stops of the first reel R1 to the third reel R3. When configured in this way, the reel effect determination means 29 is executed before the execution of each first pseudo game when it is determined that the reel control means is to execute a plurality of times of the first pseudo game by combo lottery. There are a plurality of cases in which there are a plurality of cases of only the main game, a mixture of the main game and the predetermined pseudo game, and only the predetermined pseudo game.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 performs the first display combination storage area 44a to the fifth display combination storage area when executing the normal display state process (see FIG. 36) or the normal AT state process (see FIG. 43). In the case where the display combination is set in 44e, the display combination is shifted to the head of the display combination storage area 44 one by one every time a game is executed. The pseudo game suggestion symbols to be displayed are shifted one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a number for informing the number of games to be executed before being set in the first display combination storing area 44a is displayed. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. Further, the effect control means 30 displays the pseudo game suggestion symbol at a predetermined position of the display device 81, and displays the pseudo game suggestion symbol according to the number of games executed until the display device 81 is set in the first display combination storage area 44a. The aspect may be changed (for example, color change, shape change, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 is based on receiving a command from each means constituting the control unit 11 and includes an effect process including an effect state transition process and an effect notification process. Although it is configured to execute the control process (see FIG. 33), the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute the effect control process in the game control process (see FIG. 13). In the case of such a configuration, the effect control means 30 is included in the same CPU as each means constituting the control unit 11, that is, a so-called main CPU. Moreover, when comprised in this way, the production | presentation control means 30 is comprised so that at the time of execution of various lottery processes, it may acquire either 65536 random number values of 0-65535 which the random number generation means 22 produces | generates. .

  Further, in such a configuration, the reel effect determination means 29 corresponds to the transition of the effect state to the AT state, and the reel effect that is referred to at the time of reel effect lottery without executing the process related to the transition of the main effect state. By changing the lottery table, it is possible to change the probability of executing the pseudo game and displaying the display combination temporarily. Thereby, since the slot machine 1 can change the probability that the display combination is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the effect state, it is possible to realize the gameability according to the effect state without increasing the data amount.

  Further, in this embodiment, the slot machine 1 does not establish weak rare replay and strong rare replay in the reel control means 24 when the game state is a bonus establishment state and the replay is won by internal lottery, and normal replay is performed. The reels are controlled to stop so as to be established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the internal lottery table B referred to by the internal lottery means 23 in the internal lottery in the bonus establishment state, the winning combination “Replay” Is configured with only normal replays, and it is configured so that weak rare replays and strong rare replays cannot be won. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 refers to the reel effect lottery table A when the main effect state is the first main effect state in the reel effect lottery, and the main effect state is the second main effect state. In this case, by referring to the reel effect lottery table B, the execution probability of the pseudo game is changed when the effect state shifts from the normal effect state to the AT state, and the probability that the display combination is temporarily displayed is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display combination lottery, the probability of determining the display combination in the display combination lottery table to be referred to when the display combination lottery table is referred to, and the second main production state. Change the probability that the display combination will be temporarily stopped by changing the probability to determine the display combination in the display combination lottery table to be referred to It may be configured to so that.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is configured so that the player operates the jog dial JG to select and determine the first CZ state to the third CZ state and the first pseudo bonus state to the third pseudo bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first CZ state to the third CZ state and the first pseudo bonus can be obtained by pressing the stop button B1 to the stop button B3 while the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are stopped. The state to the third pseudo bonus state may be selected and determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 adopts the BB of the first type special bonus as a bonus state, but is not limited to this, for example, the challenge bonus (CB) of the second type special bonus. It may be adopted. In this case, it is necessary to configure so that the expected value for medal acquisition in the CB state is 100% or more.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means 30 is configured to determine the winning probability of the AT transition lottery based on the stored value of the effect cumulative counter in the AT transition lottery executed when the effect state is the third CZ state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time the determination switch 76 detects an operation on the determination button JGB, the winning probability of the AT shift lottery may be determined. Moreover, when comprised in this way, the automatic continuation lottery means 30b is comprised so that it may perform the automatic continuation lottery, and it will make the effect control means 30 determine the winning probability of AT transfer lottery whenever it decides to continue a detection state. It may be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel effect determination means 29 is configured to continue the third pseudo game for a predetermined number of times when the effect state is the special CZ state. In the next game in which the state has shifted to the third main performance state, the start lever SL is started and the start switch 73 detects the start operation, thereby causing a freeze and delaying the rotation of each reel. After the symbol combination lottery is executed and the first reel R1 to the third reel R3 are rotated a predetermined number of times, the effect of automatically stopping and displaying the symbol combination determined to be stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol combination lottery is continuously repeated a predetermined number of times. The special reel effect may be executed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the effect control means 30 is when the special symbol combination (for example, “red 7-red 7-red 7”) in the special symbol combination lottery wins, the more the number of wins, the more the transition to the AT state. Depending on the number of wins for the special symbol combination during the execution of the special reel production, any of the plurality of production modes can be realized by executing the bonus production process based on the production mode advantageous to the player with respect to the grant of the game medium. It is determined whether or not the bonus effect process based on the effect mode is transferred to the AT state and the effect using a series of reels is continuously executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the effect mode selected when the state is changed, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. Also, with this configuration, the slot machine 1 has a more advantageous effect on the player regarding the provision of game media when the game machine shifts to the AT state as the number of times that the special symbol combination is won during the execution of the special reel effect increases. Since the bonus effect process based on the mode is executed, the expectation given to the player in a series of successive effects increases each time the special symbol combination is won, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 includes stop table data in which the same stop data is set when the symbols arranged on the reels are the same symbol. Different stop data may be set for the symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 performs the point calculation when executing the first reel stop control for stopping the reel within 190 ms after the stop switch detects the stop operation or the temporary stop operation as the reel stop control. The process and the stop table reference process are executed to determine the stop position of the reel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the stop position of the reel can be specified as a result of the point calculation process The reel stop position may be determined without executing the table determination process and the stop table reference process.

  In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the slot machine 1 executes an initialization process (see FIG. 14) to perform flag storage area 42, counter storage means 43, reel effect storage area 45, and game state storage. The area 46 and the main effect state storage area 47 are configured to be initialized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is initialized only when a reset switch (not shown) provided in the slot machine 1 is operated. It may be configured to.

  In the present embodiment, the reel effect determining means 29 executes combo lottery to determine the number of combos in a game won as a reel effect as a reel effect, and the first pseudo game of the determined number of combos is reel control means. The first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24 until it is executed by the reel control means 24, and then the first pseudo game is executed by the reel control means 24. When the game is executed, the lottery for determining whether or not the first pseudo game is executed again is executed, and the player enters the latent state again until it is determined that the lottery is not executed again (non-winning). It may be configured to cause the reel control means 24 to execute the first pseudo game. In such a configuration, the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first pseudo game again constitutes the continuous execution number lottery, and the first executed as a result of the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first pseudo game again. The number of simulated games constitutes the number of continuous executions.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 recognizes that the player is executing a pseudo game such as “pseudo game is being executed” on the display device 81 by the effect control means 30 during the execution of the pseudo game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can perform an effect such as lighting or blinking a lamp / LED in a pattern different from that in the game. You may be comprised so that it may recognize that the pseudo | simulation game is performed. In addition, the slot machine 1 is controlled so that when the reel control means 24 temporarily stops each reel during the pseudo game, the reels are caused to move finely such as vibration without completely stopping each reel. Thus, the player may be made aware that the pseudo game is being executed.

L1 ... Effective line: R1 ... First reel: R2 ... Second reel: R3 ... Third reel: 23 ... Internal lottery means: 24 ... Reel control means: 24a ... Stop order judging means: 25 ... Winning judgment means: 27 ... Game control means (main effect state transition means): 29 ... reel effect determination means: 30 ... effect control means (probability determination means): 30a ... push-down continuation lottery means (operation continuation lottery means): 30b ... automatic continuation lottery means: 43 ... Counter storage means (cumulative number counting means): 71 ... Medal insertion switch (operation detection means): 72 ... Bet switch (operation detection means): 73 ... Start switch (operation detection means): 74 ... Stop switch (operation detection means) ): 75 ... Dial unit (operation detection means): 76 ... Determination switch (specific operation detection means): 78 ... Reel unit: 78a ... Reel position detection Means: 79 ... hopper unit: 80 ... effect device: 81 ... display device: 83 ... acoustic device

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface;
An internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the success or failure of multiple types of roles including small roles, replays and bonuses;
Reel control means for controlling the reels to be rotated based on a stop operation by rotating the reels for each game;
In a state where the plurality of reels are stopped, a winning determination means for determining that a winning combination has been won based on the fact that a symbol combination indicating a winning pattern predetermined for each winning combination is displayed on the active line;
A payout control means for determining a payout amount of the game medium based on a payout of the winning small combination when the winning combination is won;
Based on the winning of the bonus in the normal state, the game is shifted to a bonus establishment state where the winning probability of replay is higher than in the normal state, and the gaming state is shifted to the bonus state based on the winning of the bonus in the bonus establishment state. Game control means,
In the bonus establishment state, when the production state is shifted between a plurality of types of production states including the normal production state and the assist time state, and the production state is set to the assist time state, the prize for the small role is awarded. Production control means for performing control for causing the production device to perform a prize winning assistance production to assist,
The winning determination means performs a process of executing the next game without consuming game media based on the winning of the replay,
In the normal state, the bonus establishment state, and the bonus state, the number of game media to be inserted when starting a game is set to be the same,
The internal lottery means
In the normal state and the bonus establishment state, a plurality of types of specific small roles, which are small roles in which the number of game media payouts associated with winning a prize is larger than the number of inserted coins, are not duplicated with each other and overlapped with other small roles. An internal lottery is performed so that there are multiple types of first winning modes,
In the bonus state, there is a second winning mode in which the plurality of types of specific small roles are won in duplicate, and the probability of becoming the second winning mode in the internal lottery in the bonus state is the first type of the plurality of first winning types. The probability of winning for some small roles among all small roles is higher than that in the normal state and the bonus establishment state, and the small roles other than the partial small roles The internal lottery is performed so that the winning probability is the same as the normal state and the bonus establishment state, and the small combinations other than the some small combinations include at least one of the plurality of types of specific small combinations. ,
The reel control means is
In the state where the bonus is established and the bonus and the replay or the small role are both won, the spinning reel is stopped so that the replay or the small role wins in preference to the bonus,
The correct hit order according to the type of the first winning mode is set in advance for each of the plurality of types of first winning modes, and if the correct hit order, the specific small part wins and is different from the correct hit order. In such a case, the spinning reel is stopped so that the specific small role does not win,
The production control means
When the effect state is set to the assist time state, the type of the first winning mode is determined by the winning assistance effect based on the result of the internal lottery being one of the plurality of first winning modes. A game machine that notifies the correct hit order according to
The internal lottery means performs an internal lottery so that the probability of losing in the bonus state is higher than the probability of losing in the normal state and the bonus established state,
The small combinations include a first small combination and a second small combination with a smaller number of payouts than the first small combination,
The reel control means stops the rotating reel so that the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role increases when the first small role and the second small role are won in duplicate. And a control for winning the first small role in preference to the second small role,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images